JP7110135B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

A gaming machine that executes a special zone effect related to the pending display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied
It has been proposed (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-137126 A

However, in Patent Literature 1, there is a possibility that interest will decrease after the special zone presentation is finished .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

The gaming machine described in means A is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
change effect execution means for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display;
and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is greater than the specific display whose display mode did not change while the specific effect was being executed. is also easy to change the display mode,
A notification image that allows recognition that the specific effect is being executed can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific display,
The display mode after the specific display is changed includes a first mode and a second mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first mode,
After executing the specific effect, it is possible to execute the special effect with a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect,
When the special effect is executed, the specific display changes to the second mode and a special image is displayed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.
The gaming machine described in means 1 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and to set any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, chance-up effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, chance-up effect determination processing shown in FIG. 9-2) a part that later executes the effect processing during variable display),
The suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a special suggestive effect that notifies that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU -4 part),
The execution ratio of the special suggestion effect differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the chance-up effect effect pattern When determining, the ratio determined in the pattern CU-3 according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the total ratio determined in the pattern CU-4 are different parts),
moreover,
A change effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the set value set in the gaming machine can be suggested to the player by the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect that informs that the control is in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the suggestive effect can be enhanced. can improve. Furthermore, since the player can expect further changes in the display mode of the specific display, the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing, as the special suggestive effect, a first special suggestive effect and a second special suggestive effect having a different effect mode from the first special suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can A portion where the chance-up effect can be executed with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4),
The execution ratio of the first special suggestion effect is the same regardless of the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the decision ratio of the pattern CU-3 is the part that is 10% regardless of the setting value set to 1),
The execution ratio of the second special suggestion effect differs according to the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the decision ratio of pattern CU-4 is set to part that differs depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first special suggestive effect and the second special suggestive effect is to be executed as the special suggestive effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
It further comprises a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect at a different rate according to a set value during a predetermined period from when the special suggestive effect is executed until a predetermined condition is established (for example, FIG. As shown in 9-7 and FIG. 9-8, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Part that can execute set value suggestion production at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which the set value is suggested by the execution ratio is executed in the predetermined period after the special suggestive effect is executed, the game interest in the predetermined period can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 3,
The predetermined effect execution means can execute, as the predetermined effect, a special effect that corresponds to the special suggestive effect and has a different effect mode from the special suggestive effect. As shown in 9-11, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3, the chance-up effect can be executed in the pattern CU-4),
By executing the special suggestion effect and the special effect within a specific period, the player can specify that the set value is a part of a plurality of set values (for example, , as shown in FIG. 9-11 as a modification 129SG-1, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are executed twice during the variable display of the chance-up effect 1, and set to the pachinko game machine 1. The part that can be specified that the set value is in the range of 4 to 6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not some of the setting values can be specified by executing the special suggestive effect and the special effect within the specific period. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to means 3,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a special effect corresponding to the special suggestive effect as the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. After the up effect is executed in pattern CU-3, the chance up effect can be further executed in pattern CU-4),
A player confirms that the set value is a part of a plurality of set values based on the total number of executions of the special suggestive effect and the number of executions of the special effect within a specific period. It can be specified (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11 as a modification 129SG-1, the chance-up effect is executed twice with pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 during variable display of 1 The part that can specify that the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the range of 4 to 6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many times the special suggestive effect and the special effect are executed within the specific period, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing, as the suggestive effect, a staged effect including a special stage effect that is a effect in which the effect mode changes in stages and is the special suggestive effect (for example, modification 129SG -2 as shown in FIG. 9-12, the part where the production control CPU 120 can execute the chance up production),
The predetermined effect execution means is a stage effect following the special stage effect (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the fifth stage of the chance-up effect), and a specific set value is set. It is possible to execute the production of the specific set value suggestion stage that suggests that (for example, the part where the production control CPU 120 can execute the 6th stage of the chance up production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the step effect changes to the specific set value suggesting step after the step effect changes to the special step, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine of means 7 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and to set any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect process after executing the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2) the part that executes
The suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a specific suggestive effect that suggests that the rate of control to the advantageous state is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect as pattern CU-2. executable part),
The number of times the suggesting effect executing means executes the specific suggesting effect in a predetermined period varies depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-13 as modification 129SG-3, chance-up effect is executed three times in pattern CU-2, it means that 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the chance-up effect is executed once or twice in pattern CU-2. If any one of 1 to 5 is set as the setting value in the pachinko machine 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the number of executions of the specific suggestive effect, so that the interest of the suggestive effect can be improved.

The game machine of means 8 is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and to set any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect process after executing the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2) the part that executes
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of special suggestive effects for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or part executed in pattern CU-4),
The rate at which any one of the special suggestion effects is executed is the same regardless of the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-14 as modification 129SG-4, pattern CU-3 The sum of the decision ratio of pattern CU-4 and the decision ratio of pattern CU-4 is 15% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko game machine 1),
The execution ratio of any one of the special suggestion effects differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. The determination ratio of the pattern CU-4 is the part that differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the set value set in the gaming machine is suggested to the player by the execution ratio of at least one special suggestive effect among a plurality of special suggestive effects that notify that the control is in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the suggestive production.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions according to the following means 9 to 13. Conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that executes a special zone effect related to a hold display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137126. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine with improved interest, since there is a risk that the interest in the game machine will decline after the special zone presentation is finished.

The game machine of means 9 is
In order to achieve the above purpose, the game machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to means 9,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggesting effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 10,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 11,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 9 to 12,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 12-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows a receiving command buffer at the time of dynamic winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) production mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) production mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a view showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at set values 1 and 6 with the fluctuation pattern normal reach, (B) is set with the fluctuation pattern super reach It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the setting value is 1 and setting value 6 in Example 3, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 in super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Example 4; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as a fourth embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4, (B) shows the fluctuation pattern A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with super reach It is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of variable display effect type determination in the first period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Modified Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 common to all variation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a variation pattern normal reach / super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 in common, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach, setting values 1 and 6 at setting values 1 and 6 It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in 3 periods. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a chance up production|presentation determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation pattern of a chance up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a chance up production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting value suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect pattern of setting value suggestion effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of an effect pattern of setting value suggesting effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing executable periods of the chance-up effect and the setting value suggestion effect; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of a chance up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of setting value suggestion production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the executable period of the chance up production|presentation in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution stage of the step-up production|presentation in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the executable period of the chance up production|presentation in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of chance up production|presentation in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of another execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an execution rate and an appearance rate of the notice Y of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an execution ratio and an appearance ratio of the advance notice Z of the characteristic portion 53AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 57AK. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing specific display processing of a characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in specific display processing. It is a figure which shows the change timing of the display mode of a specific display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display change pattern of a specific display of characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition ratios of zones; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the modification of characteristic part 57AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characterizing part 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed explanation by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-19.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 103SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 103SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 103SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the store clerk possessing the setting key. The lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be shared by one key.

A display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 103SG201. In other words, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 103SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 103SG025A, a second pending display device 103SG025B capable of displaying the second pending memory number, a normal symbol display device 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbols, a normal pattern pending display device 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal pattern pending memory number, A round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display section 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 103SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two types of big win symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 103SG025A and the second suspension display 103SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 103SG025A and second pending display 103SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, every time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment). In the section 103SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 103SG025A is lit, and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 103SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and the second movable body 103SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data in the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than In addition, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in Fig. 8-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7(A) and 8-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a "small hit" depending on the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state will be higher (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but stop at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) stored in ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the low-probability high base state and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the game ends and the state shifts to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or the big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the jackpot type is determined as the jackpot B. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs depending on the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of a big hit, the easier it is to determine the big win C as the type of big win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the probability of a big hit or A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in the case of changing the playability according to the setting value in this way, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), the variation pattern of super reach β big hit A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), if the setting value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805. is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the setting value is "1", , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the setting value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) determines the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player thinks that "big win B" or "big win C" will be achieved. can raise the expectations of

In addition, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of MR3 determination values 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for judging the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 371 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for failure (for the number of total pending storage in the low base of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "2", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the setting value is "3", 1 to 510 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation. Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β. (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are completely the same between each set value as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a mode is exemplified in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach differs according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the super reach loss variation The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display that is actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display to be executed in the variation pattern of super reach out in accordance with the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. may be executed with a variation pattern of

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. Each of the first display portion 103SG029A to the fifth display portion 103SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 103SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 103SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed under the control of the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. In addition, the display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004;Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the set value stored in RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation processing (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated by specifying the setting value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 is ended.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF at 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 103SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) , and proceed to 103SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as indicated by 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

In addition, at 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned on, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (103SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 103SG029 stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later, etc., to the effect control board 12. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 103SG029A, second display unit 103SG029B, third display unit 103SG029C, and fourth display unit 103SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 103SG029, as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power interruption during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 103SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014 ;Y).

8-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number It shifts up by minutes (103SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets 3 symbols as even numbers as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determining process during variable display shown in FIG. 8-15, and determines whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In this characteristic part 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (pre-announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit with the variable display mode becoming a reach as an effect in which the result of the effect is the result of suggesting an advantageous state. be. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When possible, it is possible to give priority to the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result over the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis of which the variable display effect is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger is riding fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , in the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 (B) and 8-19 (A), patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such a variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a set suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestions is to become and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Also, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to the setting suggestion that suggests which one of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders are displayed. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that the The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In this characteristic portion 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific aspect}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot gaming state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7) can be executed during variable display based on one of a plurality of types of presentation modes, and a reach notice (predetermined special mode presentation) based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 If setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific aspect) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, ready-to-win notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loss than when the result is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, in the effect during the variable display, the number of paragliders destroyed indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (e.g., eight) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which setting value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, such as the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, while extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach advance notice in the case of 103SGS292.

8-17 (A) in the production (reach notice) type determination table A, when the variation pattern is super reach, 20 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 are assigned to pattern PT-8. , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and when the variation pattern is super reach, The pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than the cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Because there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of lottery for the presence or absence and type of reach notice execution in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Go to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-9 is not won in 103SGS292, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 8-17(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four decision values are assigned to PT-5, one decision value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one decision value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 wins at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of characters displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are set as high setting (setting value 5 or 6) with a low possibility of setting suggestion (low), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are high setting (setting value 5 or 6). 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, each determination random number counter for generating these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing.

Returning to FIG. 8-15, the effect control CPU 120, as a result of performing a lottery for the presence or absence of the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} A decision is made as to whether or not the prize has been won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been elected, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is elected in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298), and proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won , Based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at 103SGS297, it is determined whether the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning at 103SGS293 (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was won in 103SGS300, when non-execution of setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is elected in 103SGS297, reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 Execution is determined (103SGS301) over setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 through PT-4 and proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is not won in 103SGS300, it is determined whether any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is selected (103SGS302), execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 8-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set at 103SGS278, that is, whether or not the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277 is performed. In the process, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

When the variable display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, sets the period until the start of the variable display effect start waiting timer for variable display effect start (103SGS279), and executes the variable display effect effect. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and go to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in this characteristic part 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

At 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decoration pattern by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one to one, but the production control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

Thus, in the present embodiment 1, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the reach notice becomes an advantageous state suggestion result as a performance result. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIG. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU120, in the lottery of the reach notice, if the variation pattern is super reach, to determine the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), reach Notice (high) will be executed (prioritized) at a higher rate than setting suggestion. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. , even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the reach notice (low) winning, setting suggestion based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at 103SGS297 (high ) is not won, 103SGS301 will determine the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion (priority). Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to the excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that the setting suggestion (low) is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 Predictive reach (low) based on 103SGS301 can be executed in preference to setting suggestions (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In this characteristic part 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and a high In some circumstances, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

In the present embodiment 1, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a setting suggestion that suggests a setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal that is displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is the timing before reaching the reach)), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can be executed in FIG. 8- 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is decided in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. part, even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low ) is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Setting suggestion (low) The part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 (see Figure 8-20 of modification 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.

Specifically, even if the variable display result is a big hit, setting suggestions that can be suggested even at timings other than the variable display are prioritized over the reach notice. , the player's expectation for the big win cannot be suitably increased, and the performance can be prevented from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. high) is determined with priority over setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the production control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display production determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , If any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. -Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the reach notice in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 Part that prioritizes the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 over setting suggestion (low))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part.) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. When,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A portion that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modification)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether there is a common effect period) and the predetermined special mode. A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 according to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 8-18)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing a predetermined effect of a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state and also suggests a setting (for example, it is possible to execute both a reach notice and a setting suggestion). Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, an image of a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player for execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is executed and during the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes the case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice execution rate is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. As an example, the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when they can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-20. 8-20, (A) is a flow chart showing the processing for determining effects during variable display as Modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the presence or absence of the execution of the reach notice and the type of the reach notice is performed with priority over the presence or absence of the execution of the setting suggestion and the lottery of the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20(A), in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, along with extracting a random number for determining the effect type, using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting), presence or absence of execution of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not shown, the effect (reach notice/setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 8-20 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (prioritized) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (For example, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is exemplified as a form that is determined based on the variation pattern and the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. Specifically, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when the hit is a big hit, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either one of the ready-to-reach notice and the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, the character (e.g. displaying an image of a moving paraglider in which appears), or displaying images in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode It may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIGS. It may be executable.

In Example 1 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display of , the effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-21(A) as the second embodiment, the first period is between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, targeting the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. Effect during variable display can be executed in a second period after the first period.

Since the variable display time for non-reach and small hit variation patterns is too short to execute the effect during variable display twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are the targets for execution of the effect during variable display. However, non-reach and small hit variation patterns may be included as targets for execution of effects during variable display.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, whether or not to execute the variable display effect is determined according to the variation pattern using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-21(B). determined by different percentages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21(B), when the variation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 variable display effect execution determination random numbers are stored in the variable display effect execution determination table. are assigned to the execution of the effect during variable display, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display. Further, when the variation pattern is super reach, 60 of the 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are assigned to the execution of the variable-display effect execution in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to non-execution of effects during variable display.

In the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the effect during variable display is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 8-21(A).

When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the ready-to-reach notice is determined at different ratios between the effect during the variable display and the effect during the variable display executed during the second period. In the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio of setting suggestion and ready-to-win notice is set to be the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-23, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach, the effect type during variable display (effect PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation (high)) at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) was determined, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation) at a rate of 60% (high)).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1% 5 to PT-7 {Suggestion setting (high)}, 35% decided pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% decided to pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, when the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 decided to {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, pattern PT-9 {reach notice at a rate of 25% (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.2% decided to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 decided to {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.5% decided to one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach The rate (60%) at which the execution of notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach It is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which execution of advance notice (low) or reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice, which is a result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to heighten expectations for a big hit.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) Or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined In the second period, regarding the effect type of the variable display effect executed during the second period, the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion to set (low) or suggestion to set (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to the reach announcement are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are determined in the second period. By being determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the second period, that is, during the variable display As the effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice is lowered (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed at the first time, so that the variable display Since the player can predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will be super reachable before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation for the variable display being super reachable is reduced. It is designed so that it can be suppressed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect during variable display executed in the second period is more favorable than the effect during variable display executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any one of pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the effect during variable display is executed, the effect during variable display is more likely to be executed in pattern PT-9, so the game for the effect during variable display being executed in pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It can sustain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display is executed twice in the first period and the second period. However, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more. In the case where the effect during variable display is executed three or more times in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the effect type so that the pattern PT-9 is likely to be determined each time the effect during variable display is executed, It may be possible to maintain the technician's sense of expectation for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {Suggestion of setting (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at different rates, so the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during the second period are executed. It is difficult for setting suggestions to be executed continuously during the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during variable display due to execution of setting suggestions in both of these two effects during variable display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined differently, so the variable display effect executed in the first period and the second period are executed It is difficult to continuously execute the reach notice with the effect during variable display. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during the variable display due to execution of the ready-to-win announcement in both of these two effects during the variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. In the case of executing, the form in which the rate of execution of reach notice is different as the effect during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is controlled in the first period In the case of executing the effect during variable display and the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period, the rate at which the ready-to-win announcement is executed as the effect during variable display may be the same. By doing so, when the effect during the variable display is executed in the first period and the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period and the second period. , the player can be expected in the same way.

In addition, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, if the advance notice effect during the variable display is executed in the same period Although the rate at which the reach notice is determined to be executed is the same as the effect during variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the notice effect during variable display executed during the same period , the rate at which execution of the ready-to-win notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁By doing so, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed as the effect during the variable display changes in the first period and the second period, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the middle production from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate of determining the execution of any pattern PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same rate, and the rate of determining the reach notice (pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9 execution ratio) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) It is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the ratio that determines the reach notice (the ratio that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the effect during variable display executed during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) always Setting suggestions are executed at a rate of 60% and reach notices are executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display effect executed in the second period (second variable display effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the ready-to-win announcement is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be made to expect the execution of the setting suggestion in the same way.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, there are more opportunities to provide reach notices and setting suggestions in one variable display, which improves interest. .

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, the ending of the jackpot game state or the variable display However, when the player is playing the game, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention. Therefore, in the effect during variable display in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is possible not only to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention to, but also as in the second embodiment. As described above, by enabling the effect during variable display to be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing the setting suggestion, but also to increase the chances of executing the setting suggestions. If it is executed at a rate higher than , it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the ready-to-win announcement in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the ready-to-win announcement even in the variation pattern of the big win.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution of neither reach announcement nor setting suggestion may be determined in at least one of the first period and the second period.

In the case where non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the reach announcement must be different between the first period and the second period. can let Further, even if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be the same between the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as a second embodiment, As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 The reach based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is better in the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period than in the case of executing the effect during variable display. The part where the notice is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, in the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is more likely to be executed than in the effect during variable display executed in the first period. It is possible to heighten expectations for being controlled to the big win game state during the second period, which is closer to the end timing of the variable display than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a rate lower than the rate of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during variable display in the first period in the second period after the first period. A portion that executes a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, at a lower rate when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation for an advantageous state by making it easier to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a timing close to one game result.

Specifically, even if non-execution of the variable display effect cannot be determined, it is possible to determine the ready-to-win notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
When executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as a second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT- 8 or the part that runs at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is changed to the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to The part that runs at a higher rate than suggested by any of the PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode is less likely to be executed. It is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, a mode is exemplified in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the ready-to-win effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during variable display may be executed even during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform reach notice and setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying a paraglider image Z1, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player for execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. , since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a possibility that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect during variable display),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode for suggesting settings (for example, setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4), and settings and types suggested by the first suggestion mode. A second suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions regarding different settings of
When the predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the first suggested mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggested mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as the second embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in 8-21, during variable display of normal reach and super reach), when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times among the plurality of times, the predetermined effect is executed later than the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26 and FIGS. As shown in -31, when the production control CPU 120 can execute the production during variable display in the first period and the second period during the variable display of normal reach or super reach as the second or third embodiment, Portion where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period than when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode becomes easier, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode is maintained. can be done.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-26, in the effect during variable display executed during the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) is made more than the effect during variable display executed during the first period. is easily executed, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the high set value such as 4 to 6 set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests the odd number setting or the even number setting, and the first suggestion The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode that makes a suggestion about a setting different in type from the setting suggested by the mode, is a mode that suggests an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The set value suggested by the mode and the set value suggested by the second suggestion mode may all be different set values (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the set value 1 and the second suggestion mode suggests the set value 1). If the value 6 is suggested, or if the first suggestion mode suggests odd settings 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even settings 2, 4, 6, etc.), the first suggestion mode suggests Both the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode and the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode may include a common setting value (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4, and the second suggestion mode is When suggesting set values 3 to 6 above the middle), even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other is a suggestion regarding a setting value that has been set. good. In other words, not only when the set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also when there are a plurality of set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode, the settings to be suggested Including those with different numbers and ranges of values, and those with different suggested contents.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means specifies when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, including the first suggestive mode and the second suggestive mode. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period. Portion where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.

Specifically, after setting the execution ratio of all setting suggestions to be the same in the first period and the second period (or a lower ratio in the second period than in the first period), the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing , avoiding excessive setting suggestions At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on a special pattern, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a rate higher than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode in the first number of times (e.g., Embodiment 2 As shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period rather than executing the effect during variable display in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at the timing close to the result of one game.

Note that, in the second embodiment, if the execution ratio of all setting suggestions is the same between the first period and the second period, setting suggestions (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, it is possible to execute the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform reach notice and setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying a paraglider image Z1, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player for execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. , since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a possibility that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times among a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times among a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs between the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period of )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the probability of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first number and the second number, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display at a higher rate than the execution of the ready-to-win notice in the first period, while in the second period , by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, Since the ready-to-win notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. In addition, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions may be determined at a lower rate than the reach notice execution, while in the second period, the setting suggestions may be decided at a higher rate than the reach notice execution. .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period, pattern PT-8. Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

In addition, in the second embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach notice can be made the same while the setting suggestion execution ratio is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-22 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the first period, while determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, in the second period, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate lower than the execution of the reach notice In the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but it is also easy to execute the ready-to-win notice, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display in the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing the effect during variable display in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. , since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a possibility that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 as the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the same rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the effect during the variable display executed in the second period is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes suggestions at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first set value or the second set value is set, the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times does not change. You can expect the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 to 8-26, regardless of whether any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is executed in the first period. The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display and the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display that is executed in the second period do not change, that is, the set value is Since the situation of setting suggestions is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance situation of the setting suggestions.

In the second embodiment, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display executed in the first period. Although the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display executed in the second period does not change from the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestions are executed during the second period is exemplified, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a ratio (appearance situation) at which a setting suggestion is executed as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6; If the ratio (appearance situation) at which setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display executed in the second period is the same, setting values other than the two setting values (for example, 3 to 6) are set in the second period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (appearance situation) may not be the same between the first period and the second period.

Further, the setting values 1 to 6 are set in the pachinko game machine 1 only in one of the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period. Regardless of which value is set, the ratio (appearance situation) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestions are executed may be the same.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period) , the part that executes the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effects of the mode at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is executed at a different rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22 as the second embodiment, variable Regarding the effect during display, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the effect during variable display executed during the second period is set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes the reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set Depending on the setting value that is set in the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at a different rate, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any period other than the above can be set as long as it is a period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of Normal Reach, the second period is from the start to the end of Super Reach, or the first period is from the start of Normal Reach or Super Reach, and the second period is Normal Reach. Or until the end of the super reach, the variation pattern temporarily stops the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then restarts the variable display, so that one variable display is simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, and the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display. , may correspond to the re-variable display period.

In the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the effect during variable display is the same number of times, reach regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The form which determines execution of an advance notice and execution of a setting suggestion in the same ratio was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. In the case of making it possible to execute times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the same number of variable display performances are performed. You may

It should be noted that, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at the same ratio with the effect during the variable display executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 63% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 2%. decided on pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 35%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 40%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 45% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 47% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 3%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. 4. Effect types (effect patterns) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period are determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {suggestion of setting (low)} at a rate of 41.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 50%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 55% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, when paying attention to the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, pattern PT at a rate of 17.5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {Suggestion of setting (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 20% The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , Pattern PT5 ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 1.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 22.5% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 2.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 40 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 2% determined to be one of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 25% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%; 5% decided to pattern PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 45% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 3.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 27.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 50 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, during the first period Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of set value (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the second period, and the variable display executed in the second period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the medium effect is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the same manner is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the ready-to-win announcement is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second set value. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of setting value (low) or suggestion of setting value (high)} are determined as the effect type is different when the setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set. , 1st set value or 2nd set value, the appearance state of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period is changed, so that the performance during the variable display can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period, a pattern is used as the effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. The ratio of PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is reduced, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( high)} is determined. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with high setting values (for example, 5, 6), the setting suggestions are higher than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with low setting values (for example, 1 to 4). is difficult to execute, it is difficult for a player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the pattern PT-9 is used as the effect type for the during-variable-display effect executed in the second period rather than the during-variable-display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice based on the pattern PT-9, so that the player's expectation for the effect during the variable display being executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. can be made

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined is the same between the effect and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, Pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined in the same form, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even if the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {Set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be different, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} may be determined differently.

In the third embodiment, the effects during variable display are the same when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion is exemplified by the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate as the effect during the variable display depending on whether the effect during the variable display is executed. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which setting suggestions are executed changes between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the effect during variable display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) and the variable display performed during the second period When the ready-to-win notice is executed as a middle effect (second variable display-in-time effect), an example is shown in which the ready-to-win notice is executed at a different rate according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the reach notice is executed as (second variable display effect), the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 if the same number of variable display effect is performed. may be executed. By doing so, if the performance during the variable display is the same number of times, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed (appearance situation) does not change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. , the player can be made to expect the execution of the ready-to-win notice without change between the performance during variable display executed in the first period and the performance during variable display executed in the second period.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following sixth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. , since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a possibility that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times among a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times among a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is performed. It is possible to execute at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as Embodiment 3, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and The part where the setting suggestions are executed at the same rate as in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 8-27) as the medium production, the variable display medium production executed in the first period and the variable display medium production executed in the second period are set. Players can similarly expect suggestions to be implemented.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, A pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period is a special pattern rather than the effect during the variable display in the first period. The part that executes a high percentage of reach announcements based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the third embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach announcement can be made different between the first period and the second period while making the execution ratio of the setting suggestion the same.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following seventh invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. , since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a possibility that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
Controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion where the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a different rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. If executed, the part that can execute the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 at different ratios according to the set values)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first set value or the second set value is set, the state of appearance of the predetermined performance of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes, so that the predetermined performance can be prevented from becoming monotonous. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-31, depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period. Since the setting suggestion execution ratio (appearance situation) changes between when the middle effect is executed and when the variable display during effect is executed in the second period, the player can obtain not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the setting value according to the appearance situation of the setting suggestion in .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period The part that can execute the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate as the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, Part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In Example 2 and Example 3 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display. and the second period each based on the fluctuation pattern and the setting value to determine which one of the reach notice and setting suggestion is to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the first period determines whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, reach notice and setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and set value It may be determined which one is to be executed, that is, whether the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period is to be executed based on different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as a fourth embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are targeted, and the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach. A performance during variable display can be executed in a second period after one period. It should be noted that the non-reach and small hit variation patterns require a short variable display time to execute the effect during variable display two or more times. is limited to

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the variation pattern. 8-33, the processing for determining effect during variable display in the fourth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 8-33, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variation pattern (103SGS311). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. Next, determine whether the specified variation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), proceed to 103SG313 in the case of normal reach or super reach, and if other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit variation pattern In this case, since it is not subject to the effect during variable display, the process for determining the effect during variable display is terminated.

In 103SGS312, when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the setting value specified in 103SGS313, whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined in a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown) ( common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table common to normal reach or super reach, and uses reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on either Specifically, when the set value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, execution of reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set It is set so that the larger the value, the higher the setting suggestion execution ratio and the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-35, focusing on the determination ratio of the effect type during variable display in the first period, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed at the rate of 20% is decided to be non-execution, and the ratio of 39% is decided to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

40. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 18%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

43. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 15%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%, Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 45.5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

46. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 10%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 3.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 40% to determine the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, in 103SGS314, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the first period has been determined (103SGS315). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and an effect execution determination flag during variable display indicating that execution of the effect during variable display in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317), Go to 103SGS318. If execution is not determined at 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the normal reach (103SGS318), and when it is determined as the normal reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, the second Whether or not to execute the effect during variable display during the period and the type of effect (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined using a not shown effect execution determination table during variable display (for normal reach) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 8-34(B), at 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 uses the variable display effect execution determination table for normal reach to determine any one of reach advance notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of the set value 1, determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and does not execute at a rate of 5%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, focusing on the case of normal reach for the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 determines that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Decided to pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, At a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

30. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Pattern PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the variation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, the super reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, whether or not to execute the effect during the variable display in the second period, and the execution The type of effect (effect pattern) to be used is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 8-34(C), at 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach, and determines any of reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of the set value 1 and the set value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute do not decide Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-36, focusing on the case of super ready-to-win with respect to the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In the case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined at a rate of 36% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and 4% Decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {at a rate of 55% reach notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, 5% of the pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined, 5% of the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 8%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 8-33, in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323 ), ending the effect during variable display. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the effect during variable display is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the set value is 1 to 6, and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, it is determined whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Determine reach warnings or setting suggestions based on separate decision tables. That is, since the criteria for determining which of the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion are to be executed are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the production during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the first period, while the reach announcement is made in the second period Since it is easier to execute, setting suggestions will not be likely to be executed in both the first period and the second period, even though it will be normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach advance notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the reach notice in the first period, the reach notice is executed in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to suppress the middle production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 to 8-37, focusing on each setting value, when executing the effect during variable display in the first period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Execution of the reach notice is determined at the same ratio (40%), and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It is determined by the same ratio (60%). For this reason, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, in the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, The player's attention can be drawn in the same way.

Also, even if the setting value is high (for example, setting value 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion in the second period, but the super reach In this case, since the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the big win from being lowered.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than the case where the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion in the super reach is executed, the player's expectations for the high setting can be heightened.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of the reach notice and setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting values are 1, 2, The higher the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestions than the reach notice. easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display (first effect during variable display) in the first period and in the second period. Although the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined at a different rate between when the effect during variable display (the effect during variable display for the second time) is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution of the ready-to-win notice at the same ratio between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the ready-to-win announcement in the same manner in the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect.

Further, in the present embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 8-34, if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the ready-to-win notice is executed at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Although the mode of determination is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the effect during the variable display of the same number of times, execution of the reach notice according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be determined in different proportions. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of the same effect type in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. can be prevented from becoming

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. , since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a possibility that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111). A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not);
Variable display means capable of executing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect process during variable display, displays the decorative pattern based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. the part that performs variable display) and
Predetermined effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes of the predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, patterns PT-1 to PT-9 are selected as the effect patterns for the variable display effect. the part that determines one from
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, effect control CPU 120 is based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as effect during variable display Setting suggestion, or part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
with
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32 as a fourth embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. ),
Based on at least the set value that has been set, determine the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first of a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 as the fourth embodiment, effect control A portion where the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value that is set in the effect during variable display in the first period),
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment As shown in FIG. 8-33 as 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value and the variation pattern set in the effect during variable display in the second period. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-33, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time), the effect during variable display is determined based on the variation pattern of the variable display. Determines the effect type of the effect * Isn't it a set value? (See 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the second period (second effect during variable display), the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the value, the type of effect during variable display is determined (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). That is, since the criteria for determining the type of effect are different between the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect, the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect are different. , the execution of the same effect type is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. parts that run at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, 8-34 as a fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, and the pattern PT -8 or the part that executes reach notices based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display during the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 is the first Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing variable display production in 2 periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set A part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and when the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the first period, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a form of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the setting value is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined whether to execute setting suggestion or reach notice only according to the set value. may

In addition, in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this Instead, in the second period, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, reach notice and setting suggestion may be determined at the same rate.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the second period, the form of determining whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach was exemplified, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may make it determine whether.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the characterizing portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. A mode in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period from the timing to the start timing of the normal reach effect and the second period after the first period has been exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is pseudo-variably displayed a plurality of times. It may be executed at the timing according to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect that looks like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-38 as modification 2, for all fluctuation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach and super reach, from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of normal reach reach production a first period before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decoration pattern, The effect during variable display can be executed in the third period which is after the second period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the decoration pattern for the third time.

In addition, in this modification 2, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first period. Executed according to the re-variable display at the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second period is executed according to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed according to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may be executed according to the re-variable display.

In this modification 2, in the above-described effect determination process during variable display, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 , and for the second period and the third period, variable display based on the set value only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach A process for determining the type of presentation is executed.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the variation pattern (does not determine execution of the reach notice). It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is decided at a rate of 100%, and execution of setting suggestion is not decided. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period By setting the ratio of determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period or the second period is performed. When executing the effect during variable display in three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. In other words, since the determination criteria for the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the number of times of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also the possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice, and the third re-variable In the third period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

In this way, in the case of a variation pattern involving one or two pseudo-continuous performances, it is possible to suggest settings while suppressing the decrease in the reliability of the ready-to-win announcement due to frequent occurrence of the ready-to-win announcement. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation for the big win due to frequent occurrence of setting suggestion in the case of the variation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous performances.

In addition, in the second modification, in the first period in which the reliability of the jackpot is the lowest, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, rather than the reach notice, so the setting suggestion is preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than in the first period, the reach notice is set according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Since the decision is made with priority, the player's expectation for the big win can be favorably increased.

In addition, in this modified example 2, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, it does not have to be the one that determines the execution of setting suggestions at a rate of 100%. Also, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, but the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Also, in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, the reach notice It does not have to be a 100% decision on execution.

Further, in this modification 2, in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern Although the execution of the reach notice is determined according to whether it is normal reach or super reach with priority over the setting suggestion, the present invention is not limited to this, the first period and the second period , regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be determined with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the setting value with priority over the reach notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of In the first number of times (e.g., the first period or the second period), at least if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern You may make it determine reach notice.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the second period and the third period, according to the setting value and the variation pattern, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is to this It is not limited, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or the reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the variation pattern.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as an effect during the variable display executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is determined by making the rate at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the rate at which the ready-to-reach notice is determined. Although a form in which execution is determined with priority is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As for the effect, the setting suggestion may be preferentially determined according to the order of the processing for determining the effect type.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is set higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although a form in which execution is prioritized is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As an effect, execution of the ready-to-win announcement may be preferentially determined according to the order of processing for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the effects during variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display. It may be executable over the variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are prefetched and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 during the variable display effect at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at the timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective period of operation of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state indication result, a form is exemplified in which a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in the indication of an advantageous state include a stop symbol notice suggesting which pattern the variable display will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common effect period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is suggested using a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, when the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, the production result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach notice in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the production mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is higher than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority etc. Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and movement of movable bodies.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion indicates which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as the setting suggestion in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, a suggestion of the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the slot machine, a state that is advantageous to the player means a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small combination, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), and a state in which an advantageous operation mode for the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in a slot machine, a special combination such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not complete and the special combination is carried over. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols will be derived and displayed, setting suggestions suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (multiple variable displays), AT state It is possible to execute over a plurality of games (multiple times of variable display) from the time an ART state is won until the AT state or ART state is started.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 129SG of the Present Embodiment)
Next, the characteristic portion 129SG of this embodiment will be described. Although the details will be described later, this characteristic part 129SG is capable of executing a special suggestive effect that notifies that the game state is controlled to a big win during the variable display, and the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect and the effect after the special suggestive effect. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the execution ratio of the predetermined effect. Since the characterizing portion 129SG performs partially the same processing as the characterizing portion 103SG, only processing different from the characterizing portion 103SG will be described below.

In addition, in this characteristic part 129SG, a form in which the contents of the characteristic part 103SG (a form suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the production pattern during variable display) is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the characterizing portion 129SG and the contents of the characterizing portion 103SG disclosed below may be performed in duplicate.

The characteristic portion 129SG will be described below with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-10.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the characteristic portion 129SG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag indicating that the first variable display start command has been received is set. (129 SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, it is associated with the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer (not shown) at the time of start winning The various command data and various flags stored in the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (129SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (129SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set, the process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the second variable display start command reception buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the special figure reservation storage are shifted upward by one buffer number (099SGS374). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

After executing 129SGS272 or 129SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern from the variation pattern designation command storage area (129SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop pattern) of the decoration pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the variable display result specifying command specifying the variable display result) (129SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the variable display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Store. The variation pattern designation command and the variable display result designation command are commands sent to the performance control CPU 120 (performance control board 12) when the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process (S111).

In addition, in the characteristic part 129SG, when the received variable display result designation command is a variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. A combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is a variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as a stop pattern ( determine the jackpot pattern). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to loss, a combination of decorative patterns (lost pattern) in which three patterns are not aligned is determined as a stop pattern.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 specifies a variation pattern from the variation pattern designation command read at 129SGS275, and determines whether or not the specified variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (129SGS277). If the specified variation pattern is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to the processing of 129SGS287, and if the specified variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach, specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 (129 SGS278). It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 receives a set value designation command from the CPU 103 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and stores the set value specified from the set value designation command in the RAM 122. It is sufficient to specify the stored setting value.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect suggesting a big hit in the variable display based on the set value specified in 129SGS 278 or the result of the variable display, and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect. (129SGS279).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (129SGS503), and if the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display result Whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the set value specified as the big hit (129SGS304). Further, when the variable display result is a loss, whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the set value specified as the variable display result being a loss (129SGS305).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 9-3, a total of four patterns from pattern CU-1 to pattern CU-4 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 129SGS304 and 129SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern CU-1 is a production pattern indicating that the degree of expectation for big win is low (expectation for big win: low), and pattern CU-2 has a higher degree of expectation for big win than pattern CU-1 (big hit expectation). Expectation level: high) This is a production pattern indicating that. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big win. Pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4 are both effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit, but the effect modes are different.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), in the process of 129SGS304 described above, the effect control CPU 120, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, gives a chance-up effect at a rate of 39%. decided not to execute, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and It decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-3 at the rate of 1%, and decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of 1%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the chance-up performance is not executed at a rate of 38%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 2%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of . Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 37%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 3%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of .

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the chance-up effect at a rate of 36%, and executes the chance-up effect at a rate of 10%. The pattern CU-1 is determined to be executed, the chance-up performance is determined to be executed in the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%. , and decides to execute the chance-up effect in pattern CU-4 at a rate of 4%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 35%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 5%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of . Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the chance-up performance is determined at a rate of 34%, and the chance-up performance is executed with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 10%. decided to execute the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and decided to perform the chance-up performance with the pattern CU-3 at a rate of 6%. It is determined that the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), in the process of 129SGS304 described above, the effect control CPU 120, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the chance up effect at a rate of 50% , decides to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-1 at a rate of 40%, decides to execute the chance-up production with the pattern CU-2 at a rate of 10%, and 0 It decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-3 at the rate of 0%, and decides to execute the chance-up performance in the pattern CU-4 at the rate of 0%.

That is, in the characteristic portion 129SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state is low when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-1 (the degree of expectation for the big win is low). In addition, when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, the ratio of control to the big win game state is high (high expectation of big win). Furthermore, when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the game is always controlled to a big win game state. In addition, the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 is common (uniformly 10%) regardless of the set value, whereas the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4 is It is set so that it increases as the set value increases. That is, in this characteristic part 129SG, the total ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio executed in the pattern CU-4 differs according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In particular, the set value is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4.

Incidentally, the chance-up effect in this feature part 129SG is a effect in which a character appears on the image display device 5 during the ready-to-win effect, and the content of the character's lines suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit (see FIG. 9-9). ), the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect may be a performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win according to the contents of the character's lines, as long as the degree of expectation for the big win can be suggested to the player. No need.

In addition, the determination ratio of the effect pattern (pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4) for notifying that the chance-up effect in the present characteristic portion 129SG is controlled to the jackpot game state is as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A). 11% when the set value is 1, 12% when the set value is 2, 13% when the set value is 3, 14% when the set value is 4, and 15% when the set value is 5. %, and when the set value is 6, it is 16%. Therefore, the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern for reporting that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, and the pachinko game machine. It is set to increase as the set value set to 1 increases.

Returning to FIG. 9-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the chance-up effect is determined after executing the processing of 129SGS304 or 129SGS305 (129SGS306). If the execution of the chance-up performance is not determined, the chance-up performance determination processing is terminated, and if the execution of the chance-up performance is determined, the determined performance pattern is stored (129SGS307) and the chance-up performance is stored. A chance-up effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of is decided is set, and the chance-up effect execution processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the chance-up effect execution determination flag is set after executing the chance-up effect determination process (129SGS279) (129SGS280). If not set, proceed to 129SGS283, and if the chance-up effect execution determination flag is set, set a value corresponding to the period until the start of the chance-up effect to the chance-up effect start town timer (129SGS281) ), clear the chance-up effect execution determination flag, and proceed to 129SGS283 (129SGS282).

The effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the timer for waiting to start the chance-up effect each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the chance-up effect is executed based on the fact that the timer for waiting to start the chance-up effect has timed up. A process table for the chance-up effect may be set according to the effect pattern. Also, after setting the process table for the chance-up effect, the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect lamp 9, etc.) are set in accordance with the value of the process timer for the chance-up effect each time the effect process during variable display is executed. ) to execute the chance-up effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120, as the process of 129SGS283, determines whether or not execution in the effect pattern (pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4) of the jackpot notification of the chance-up effect is determined. When the performance pattern of the chance-up performance is not decided, the process proceeds to 129 SGS288, and when the performance pattern of the chance-up performance is decided, the pachinko game machine 1 is set. A setting value suggesting effect determination process (129SGS284) for determining whether or not to execute a set value suggesting effect suggesting a set value and determining the effect pattern of the set value suggesting effect is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the set value suggesting effect and the effect pattern based on the set value (129SGS312).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 9-6, a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 129SGS312. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 129SG, setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low and setting values 5 and 6 are to be high, but setting values 1 to 3 may be set to be low and setting values 4 to 6 may be set to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 129SGS312 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, as shown in FIG. Decide to execute, decide to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-1 at a rate of 7.15%, and execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.35%. decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.36%, and decided to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.14%. , decides to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, it is decided not to execute the set value suggesting effect at a rate of 85%, and the set value suggesting effect is pattern SS at a rate of 3.21%. Decided to execute with -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 10.73%, and set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.21% At a rate of 0.85%, it is decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4, and at a rate of 0%, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5. to decide. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, it determines non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect at a rate of 80%, and pattern SS of the set value suggesting effect at a rate of 11.45%. Decided to execute with -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.85%, set value suggestion effect with pattern SS-3 at a rate of 4.28% At a rate of 1.42%, it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4, and at a rate of 0%, the set value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-5. to decide.

In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect at a rate of 75%, and sets at a rate of 3.57%. Decide to execute the value suggesting effect in pattern SS-1, decide to execute the set value suggesting effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 14.30%, and set value suggesting at a rate of 1.78%. It is decided to execute the effect in pattern SS-3, it is decided to execute the setting value suggesting effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 5.35%, and the setting value suggesting effect is performed in pattern SS at a rate of 0%. Decide to run at -5. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the setting value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS at a rate of 4.28%. Decided to execute at -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 8.57%, set value suggestion effect at a rate of 10.73% pattern SS-3 , decides to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6.42%, and executes the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. to decide. In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it determines non-execution of the setting value suggestion effect at a rate of 65%, and sets value suggestion effect pattern SS at a rate of 10.00%. Decided to execute at -1, decided to execute setting value suggestion effect with pattern SS-2 at a rate of 5.00%, set value suggestion effect at a rate of 5.00% pattern SS-3 , decided to execute the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 12.50%, and executed the setting value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 2.5%. decide to

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the present characteristic section 129SG is set such that the larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the higher the rate at which execution of the set value suggesting effect is determined. there is

Incidentally, the chance-up effect and the set value suggesting effect in the characterizing part 129SG are effects that can be executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect during variable display of super reach, as shown in FIG. 9-8. Further, the setting value suggesting effect is a effect that can be executed only when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 that notifies the big win, as described above, and is performed after the chance-up effect. It is executable.

In addition, the setting value suggesting effect in the characteristic part 129SG suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the image of any one or all of the plurality of characters on the image display device 5. (see FIGS. 9-10), the present invention is not limited to this, and if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested, the setting value suggesting effect effect mode may not display images of any or all of the plurality of characters on the image display device 5 .

Returning to FIG. 9-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the setting value suggestion effect is determined after executing the process of 129SG312 (129SGS313). If it is decided not to execute the set value suggesting effect, the set value suggesting effect determining process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the set value suggesting effect, the determined effect pattern is stored (129SGS314), A setting value suggesting effect execution determination flag is set, and the set value suggesting effect determination process is terminated (129SGS315).

Returning to FIG. 9-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value suggestion effect execution determination flag is set after executing the process of 129SGS283 (129SGS285). If the setting value suggesting effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 129 SGS287, and if the set value suggesting effect execution determining flag is set, the set value suggesting effect start waiting timer is set until the set value suggesting effect start time. (129SGS286), clear the setting value suggestion effect execution determination flag, and proceed to the processing of 129SGS288 (129SGS287).

Incidentally, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the set value suggestion effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the set value suggestion effect start waiting timer is counted up. It is sufficient to set the process table of the setting value suggestive effect according to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect. In addition, after setting the process table for setting value suggesting effect, each time the effect process during variable display is executed, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect lamp 9, etc.) to execute the set value suggesting effect.

At 129SGS288, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (129SGS289).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (129SGS290). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (129SGS291). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (129SGS292). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (129SGS293).

Next, the effect modes of the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10. First, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect at the start of variable display of super reach, as shown in FIGS. At , the reach effect of super reach is started. Then, when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the ready-to-win effect, characters are displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 as a chance-up effect as shown in FIGS. 9-9(C) to 9-9(F). At the same time, the dialogue corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed as the dialogue of the character.

In particular, when the chance-up performance is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4, the variable display result is a big win according to the words displayed on the image display device 5, and after the variable display ends, control is made to the big win game state. to be notified.

Also, when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. After a specific period of time has elapsed after the chance-up effect is finished, an image of one or all characters among a plurality of characters is displayed as a set value suggesting effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-10(B) to 9-10(E), when the setting value suggestion effect is executed in patterns SS-1 to SS-4, the image display device 5, different character images are displayed. Furthermore, when the set value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-5 (when the set value suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode informing that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6). , all characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 when the setting value suggestion effect is executed in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4 are displayed. For this reason, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, the player is made to pay attention to which character image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the setting value suggestion effect, and the number of character images displayed on the image display device 5 is It is possible to attract the player's attention and improve the amusement of the game.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 129SG, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that control is performed to the big win game state when the variable display result becomes a big win. A chance-up performance can be executed in a performance pattern (pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4), and the chance-up performance is executed in a performance pattern for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to a jackpot game state. The ratio differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁In other words, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested to the player according to the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the big win game state. It is designed to improve the interest of the close-up production.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 in the chance-up effect are exemplified as a specific suggestive effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The specific suggestion effect is "displaying (derived display ), there is no particular limitation as long as it is an effect that notifies that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state before the game is executed.

9-4, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The ratio of execution in the production pattern for informing that control is performed may be low.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the effect control CPU 120 is a pattern CU-3 which is a effect pattern for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled during the reach effect of the super reach. Alternatively, after executing the chance-up effect in pattern CU-4, it is possible to further execute the setting value suggesting effect, and the execution ratio of the setting value suggesting effect is set in the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 9-7. Since the set value is set so as to be higher as the set value is larger, the player can be made to pay attention to the execution of the set value suggesting performance after the chance up performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic portion 129SG, patterns CU-3 and CU-4 of the chance-up effect are used as the special suggestive effect in the present invention, and the predetermined effect in the present invention is a setting value suggestive effect that is different from the chance-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A predetermined effect may be executed as a series of effects. Further, as the predetermined effect different from the special suggestive effect and the effect mode, for example, it may be applied to an effect such as a ready-to-win effect of super reach, which is not necessarily an effect to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 129SG, the chance-up effect can be executed in patterns CU-3 and CU-4 at different ratios according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the chance-up effect can be executed. After executing pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed in both the chance-up effect and the setting value suggesting effect by executing the setting value suggesting effect. Although the form that can be suggested is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested only by the chance-up effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, as the effect pattern of the chance-up effect, two effect patterns, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, are controlled to the jackpot game state. It is provided as a performance pattern to be notified, and the rate at which the chance-up performance is executed in the pattern CU-3 is 10% in common regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while the chance-up performance is provided. The rate at which the effect is executed in the pattern CU-4 differs according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加That is, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the set value is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to which one will be executed, the interest of the suggestive effect can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 129SG, two production patterns, pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, are provided as production patterns for the chance-up production as production patterns for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. The present invention is not limited to this, and three or more performance patterns for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state may be provided as the performance pattern for the chance-up performance. Further, among the effect patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is to be controlled, only the execution ratio of some of the effect patterns may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, The execution ratio of all production patterns may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁

Further, in the present characteristic portion 129SG, during the variable display of 1, after the pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect is executed as the special suggestive effect in the present invention, the set value suggestive effect is performed as the predetermined effect in the present invention. Although the executable form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. After executing with one production pattern (pattern CU-3 in the example shown in FIGS. 9-11), the other production pattern (in FIG. In the example shown, pattern CU-4) may be executable.

During the variable display of 1, after executing one of the performance patterns for notifying that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state, the other performance pattern that notifies that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big win game state is executed. In the case where the performance pattern is executable, the content to be notified to the player may differ according to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 during the variable display of 1, it is only controlled to the jackpot game state as in the characteristic portion 129SG. When the chance-up performance is executed twice in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, in addition to the notification that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, the pachinko game machine 1 is also notified. It may be notified that the setting value set to is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6).

By doing so, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed from 4 to 6 by executing the chance-up effect with patterns CU-3 and CU-4 during the variable display of 1. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether it is either (in other words, during the variable display of 1, the number of times executed in the production pattern that informs that the chance-up production is controlled to the big win game state Therefore, the player can pay attention to whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6), so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, after executing one of the production patterns for notifying that the chance-up production is controlled to the jackpot game state as a special suggestive production during the variable display, the chance-up production is further executed in the big win game state. In the form that can be executed in the other production pattern for notifying that the state is controlled, the chance-up production executed first corresponds to the special suggestive production in the present invention, and the chance-up production to be executed later corresponds to the special suggestion production in the present invention. Applies to special performances.

It should be noted that, in this modification 129SG-1, as shown in FIG. Although a form in which the execution periods do not overlap is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least part of the execution periods of both chance-up effects may overlap. That is, in the present invention, the execution of the special suggestive effect and the special effect within the specific period includes the fact that the execution period of the special suggestive effect and the execution period of the special effect do not overlap, and that the execution period of the special suggestive effect does not overlap. It includes both the execution period of the special effect and the one that at least partially overlaps.

Further, in this modification 129SG-1, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the chance-up effect is executed in patterns CU-3 and CU-4 during the variable display of 1. , The present invention is not limited to this, and both chance-up effects may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. That is, in the present invention, the execution of the special suggestion effect and the special effect within the specific period includes the execution of both chance-up effects during one variable display and the execution of both chance-up effects over a plurality of variable displays. It includes both of those in which up effects are executed. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is indicated by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1. When both chance-up effects are executed during a plurality of variable displays, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the plurality of variable displays. do it.

In addition, in this modification 129SG-1, when the chance-up effect is executed only once in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, it is notified only that it is controlled to the jackpot game state. , a mode in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified within a predetermined range by executing the chance-up effect twice in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 was exemplified, but the present invention The pattern CU-3 is not limited to this, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example, 1 , 2, or 6), and pattern CU-4 notifies that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is set as pattern CU-4. An effect pattern may be used to notify that the value is within a range different from -3 (for example, within a range of 4 to 6). In this manner, the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are suggested more accurately by executing the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of the chance up effect 1. (In the above example, pattern CU-3 indicates that the set value is 1, 2, or 6, and pattern CU-4 indicates that the set value is 4 to 6.) The notification confirms that the set value is 6).

Furthermore, in the case where the chance-up effect is executed twice in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, whether or not the effect periods of both chance-up effects overlap or not is determined. A set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested according to the length of the overlap of the performance periods of the performance.

Further, in the characterizing section 129SG, a mode in which the chance-up effect can be executed as the suggestive effect in the present invention has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive effect in the present invention includes a mode of effect. A step-up effect in which changes step by step can be executed, and suggested contents may differ according to the number of times (the number of stages) that the effect mode of the step-up effect changes.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-12 as modification 129SG-2, step-up effect can be executed during the period from the start of variable display to ready-to-reach, and only the first stage of step-up effect is executed. is non-reach, if it is executed up to the second stage, it is normal reach, if it is executed up to the third stage, it is super reach (jackpot expectation: weak), if it is executed up to the fourth stage, it is super reach (jackpot expectation : strong), respectively.

Furthermore, when the step-up effect is executed up to the fifth stage, it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and when it is executed up to the sixth stage, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example , range of 4 to 6). In this case, the fifth stage of the step-up effect corresponds to the special stage of the present invention, and the sixth stage of the step-up effect corresponds to the specific set value suggesting stage of the present invention. In this way, when it is notified that the step-up performance is executed up to the fifth stage and the control to the jackpot game state is notified, the step-up performance is further executed up to the sixth stage and the pachinko game machine 1 is activated. Since the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the set value range is notified, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this variation 129SG-2, a step-up effect is executed as a suggestive effect in the present invention. In addition to those that change in order from the 3rd stage to the 4th stage, etc., there are also those that change from the 1st stage to the 4th stage without going through the 2nd stage and the 3rd stage (so-called step skipping). It may be possible. It should be noted that, in the case of executing step-skipping as a step-up effect in this way, when the execution up to the sixth step (the step suggesting the set value) is decided, the target of the step-skipping is the first step to the fourth step. While performing either one, by executing the 6th step after passing through the 5th step of notifying that the game state is always controlled to the big win game state, it is notified that the 6th step is controlled to the big win game state. It may be possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that it is the step of performing. Furthermore, in the case of executing the stage skipping, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested depending on which stage the stage skipping is to be executed.

Further, in the modification 129SG-1, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, which are pattern patterns for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state, can be executed a plurality of times. has been exemplified according to the number of times pattern CU-3 or pattern CU4 is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in , instead of pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, pattern CU-2, which is a pattern CU-2, which is a pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, can be executed a plurality of times, and these chance-up effects are performed by pattern CU. The suggested content may differ depending on the number of times the -2 is executed.

Specifically, the period from the start of the variable display to reaching the reach, the period from reaching the reach to the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the period from the start of the reach effect of super reach to the variable display A chance-up performance can be executed once each in a period until the end (three-time chance-up performance can be executed during one variable display), and a big win is expected when the chance-up performance is executed only once. When the chance-up performance is executed twice, it is suggested that the game state will be controlled to a big win game state, and when the chance-up performance is executed three times, it is set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加It may be set so as to notify that the current set value is within a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

As for the case where the suggested contents are changed according to the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, for example, when the variable display result is specified at the start of the variable display and the variable display result is a loss or a small hit. determines that the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is to be executed only once. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is further specified. If the set value is any one of 1 to 5, the chance-up effect pattern CU-2 is determined to be executed once or twice, and if the set value is 6, the chance-up effect pattern is determined. It suffices to decide between 1 and 3 runs on CU-2.

In addition, in the case where the suggested content is changed according to the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, the number of executions of the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is first determined by lottery, and the variable display result and the pachinko game are displayed. The number of times of execution may be re-determined according to the setting value set in the gaming machine 1 .

Further, in the characteristic portion 129SG, as shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the effect pattern of the chance-up effect is determined when the variable display result is a big hit, it is controlled to the big win game state. A pattern CU-3, which is a performance pattern to be notified, is determined at a common rate (uniformly 10%) regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while informing that the game is controlled to a big win game state. By determining the pattern CU-4 as a performance pattern at different ratios according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, the performance pattern notifies that the chance-up performance is controlled to the big winning game state. Although the execution ratio differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 129SG-4 is shown in FIGS. As shown, the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the production pattern for notifying that the chance-up production is controlled to the big win game state (the ratio of executing the chance-up production in the pattern CU-3 and the chance-up production in the pattern CU-4 ) regardless of the set value set in the pachinko machine 1 (15% in the example shown in FIGS. 9-14), while the set in the pachinko machine 1 The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 may be different according to the set value. By doing so, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the player according to the execution ratio of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are the effect patterns for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Since it is possible to suggest against, the interest of the chance-up production can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 129SG, a mode is exemplified in which the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested by the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4. It is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be capable of executing a setting value change suggesting effect indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. In particular, when the setting value change suggesting effect is executed on the day after the low setting value is suggested by the chance-up effect or the like in the pachinko game machine 1, a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1 for the player. Since it is possible to make the player expect that the game is being played, the game of the player can be promoted.

Further, in the characterizing section 129SG, the setting value suggesting effect is executed after the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4. may be set longer than the performance period of the chance-up performance. By doing so, as evidence that the game has been played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the high setting value is set, the period during which the player shoots an image of the setting value suggesting effect with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone is shortened. can be secured. In addition, in the case where the period for the player to take the image of the set value suggesting effect is secured by setting the effect period of the set value suggesting effect longer than the effect period of the chance up effect in this way, the chance up is further increased. After the performance is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, by making it possible to execute the performance suggesting that the set value suggesting performance is executed, the player who recognizes the performance can suggest the set value. The mobile terminal may be prepared before the performance starts.

In addition, in the characteristic part 129SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 can be determined as the production pattern of the chance-up production irrespective of the type of the big win. The present invention is not limited to this, and only when the most advantageous jackpot type for the player in the variable special figure (for example, jackpot C if the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-9) is determined Chance-up production Pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 may be determined as the effect pattern.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect are exemplified as a special suggestive effect for notifying that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, but the present invention is this. However, the special suggestion production is a production that variably displays the decorative patterns in a combination of big hits (so-called all-rotation reach production), and a pseudo-continuous production that repeats the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative patterns. If so, the temporary stop and re-variable display up to the upper limit number of decorative symbols are performed as the pseudo-continuous effect, and the pending display notice effect of notifying the variable display result of the variable display that has not been executed yet in the display mode of the pending memory display is executed. If possible, display of the holding memory display in gold, rainbow color, etc., light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner to notify the big win, sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R to inform the big win, specific movable body It may be an action or the like.

Furthermore, as a special suggestive effect, these full-rotation reach, pseudo-continuous effect, pending memory display effect, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8 and 8R, movement of the movable body, etc. A different set value may be suggested by combining the special suggesting effects of , and changing the effect mode of the special suggesting effect to be executed later.

For example, after it is notified that the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols are executed up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 4 times) as a pseudo-continuous effect and the control to the jackpot game state is performed, the all-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed. , as the all-rotation ready-to-win performance, if the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is directed from the top to the bottom, it is notified that the set value is any one of 1 to 3, and the decorative pattern is variably displayed as the full-rotation ready-to-reach performance. If the direction is from the left to the right, it is notified that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and the variable display direction of the decoration pattern is displayed as the all-rotation ready-to-win effect as viewed from the player. If it is directed from the far side to the near side of 5, it is notified that the set value is 6. - 特許庁

Further, for example, after the game effect lamp 9 emits light in rainbow colors at the start of the variable display to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled, if the melody A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the set value is changed. 1 to 3, and if melody B is output from speakers 8L and 8R, it is notified that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and melody C is output from speakers 8L and 8R. For example, it informs that the set value is 6.

Further, for example, after being notified that the variable display result corresponding to the pending memory display is displayed in rainbow color and that the variable display result corresponding to the pending memory display becomes a big hit (controlled to the big win game state after the end of the variable display). By the time the variable display for the big win ends, the movable body A operates to inform that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and the movable body B before the variable display for the big win ends. operates to notify that the set value is any one of 4 to 6, and both movable body A and movable body B operate until the variable display that becomes the big hit ends, so that the set value is 6 to notify that

In addition, in the characteristic portion 129SG, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be suggested in both the chance-up effect and the setting-value suggesting effect. Since the value and the setting value suggested in the setting value suggesting effect are determined separately, it is conceivable that these suggestions do not match depending on the effect mode of the chance-up effect and the set value suggesting effect. For this reason, for example, when the set value is not suggested in the chance-up effect (when the execution of pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 is not determined), the set value is suggested only by the set value suggestion effect, A set value may be suggested in the chance-up presentation (execution of pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 is determined) only when non-execution of set value suggestion presentation is determined. In addition, the store clerk or the like of the game hall changes whether or not to suggest the setting value as a chance-up effect using the effect adjustment function or the like provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and the ratio of execution/non-execution of the setting value suggesting effect. It may be possible.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. ) that can be set to any setting value (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, chance-up effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, chance-up effect determination processing shown in FIG. 9-2) a part that later executes the effect processing during variable display),
The suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a special suggestive effect that notifies that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the chance-up effect in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU -4 part),
The execution ratio of the special suggestion effect differs depending on the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the chance-up effect effect pattern When determining, the ratio determined in the pattern CU-3 according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the total ratio determined in the pattern CU-4 are different parts),
moreover,
A change effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. A game machine whose mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to this feature, the set value set in the gaming machine can be suggested to the player by the execution ratio of the special suggestive effect that informs that the control is in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the suggestive effect can be enhanced. can improve. Furthermore, since the player can expect further changes in the display mode of the specific display, the interest in the game is improved.

Also, the set value may be associated with a change effect or a specific effect. For example, when the advantageous set value of 6 is set, the execution ratio of the change effect or the specific effect may be made higher than when the disadvantageous set value of 1 is set. By doing so, the set value can be estimated from the execution ratio of the change effect or the specific effect, and the interest is improved.
In addition, if the setting value is suggested by a plurality of elements (two elements of the execution ratio of the special suggestion effect and the execution ratio of the change effect or the specific effect), the setting that is advantageous to the player with the plurality of elements. If a value is implied, the player can be more confident that the setting is advantageous to the player, and even if one element does not suggest a setting that is advantageous to the player, other If an advantageous set value is suggested by the element (1), the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, it has multiple specific effects (blue display zone, yellow display zone, red display zone), and can be displayed only when the setting value is a specific value (for example, 4 to 6 that is 4 or more is set) A specific effect (red zone) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the specific effect.

Also, the suggestive effect and the specific effect may be associated with each other. For example, the suggestive effect and the specific effect are not executed at the same time, but only the special suggestive effect may be executed simultaneously with the specific effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute without lowering the execution frequency of the more advantageous special suggestive effect.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (eg, pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display is provided. ,
A change effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. A game machine whose mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another form.

(Other form examples)

(Description of Characteristic Portion 112IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 112IW will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and control is possible to achieve an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different rates according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of other characteristic portions may be configured so that the setting can be changed in the same manner as the characteristic portion 112IW. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 112IW003, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into the lock to unlock it. 112IW003a cannot be released.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting key 112IW051 for changing set values such as a winning probability of a big hit (ball output rate), etc., to be described later in the setting change state. A setting switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main unit provided with operation units that can be operated by the player, such as the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052, is accommodated in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11. The setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 112IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In this characterizing portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

A display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 112IW201. In other words, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 112IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic portion 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A is attached to cover the right side of the case 112IW201 from the rear side. This security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1, It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 . Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. Separation releases the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab, so that it becomes operable.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is canceled, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened by a game arcade clerk or the like using the door key, the setting values cannot be changed by operating the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switches 112IW052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game device such as a card unit or the like installed between the spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to change the setting value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right rear side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052, the board can be opened through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the status of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In this characteristic part 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables such as the determination table shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 10-4(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. - In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C), the big hit type determination table (not shown), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the losing variation pattern determination table (not shown), the normal figure A display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3.

(Display result determination table)
FIGS. 10-4A to 10-4C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 10-4(A) to 10-4(C) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a total of three set values 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, a mode is exemplified in which the greater the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of a big hit), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this characteristic part 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning hole (big winning hole, second big winning hole, first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, general winning hole) It is possible to calculate various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases based on the totalization.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 has a four-digit display. The display portion of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments each drawing a figure of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments.

Display contents are displayed on the first and second digit display portions, and numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third and fourth digit display portions. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. be done.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big prize opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls entering the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls entering the large prize opening during the big win game state to the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." "y7." is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the third and fourth digit display portions.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." , "A7." is displayed on the first and second digit display portions. Further, when the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative role ratio is displayed, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed in percentage (percentage display) in the display portion of the third digit and the display portion of the fourth digit.

When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." "B6." In addition, when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third and fourth digit display parts, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third digit display section and the fourth digit display section.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030 for the set value set at that time. Short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 display can be sequentially changed.

In addition, in this characterizing section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. good.

(setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing part 112IW will be described. Figures 10-5 to 10-7 are flowcharts showing game control main processing in the characterizing section 112IW. In this characteristic portion 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, it returns to step 112IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 112IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed, and the change and confirmation of the set value, the initialization and recovery processing of the RAM, etc. are executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization command, a command for recovery, and the like, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and a command can be omitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value is the factory default value (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible setting value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If the settings are not factory default (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the setting values have already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the data to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by performing the same processing as in step S4. It is determined whether or not data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, at step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 112IWS008). At step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

At step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON (the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is ON, RAM clear processing for clearing the contents stored in the RAM 102 is executed after the processing related to setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120AKSA03.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is off (the door is closed) (N at step 112IWS011) or if the setting key 112IW051 is off (N at step 112IWS012), is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process does not proceed to step 120AKSA01, but proceeds to loop processing. In addition, before entering the loop processing, the control (processing of step 112IWS010) of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 may be executed.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S013, in this characteristic part 112IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 112IWS007, N of S008), or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 112IWS006 Y), if power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 112IWS009 Y), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the game machine frame 112IW003 opened. On this condition, the setting values after step 120AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, depending on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, ON/OFF of the clear switch), processing for confirming the setting (setting confirmation processing) or processing for changing the setting (setting change) is performed. process). It should be noted that error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating to start the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). Moreover, when the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light-emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is the factory-shipped value (for example, "0") (step 120AKSA06). If it is the setting value at the time of shipment from the factory (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the setting value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). At step 120AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of RAM 102 is updated to "1".

At step 120AKSA07, if the setting value is the value at the time of shipment from the factory, the setting value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other setting values may be used as the initial value. The set value is also set to the initial value "1" when there is a RAM abnormality error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed). You may make it In this case, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed (step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM abnormality flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM abnormality flag is on or not.

If the set values are not factory-set values (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the processing of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08 ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is ON (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 120AKSA12). The setting value is updated each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the setting value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the setting value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the setting value is "3", it is updated to "1". You should update. Note that a specific set value may be specified by operating the setting switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process for changing the setting is not executed. In this case, or if the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON (step 120AKSA11; No), after executing the processing of step 120AKSA12, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is OFF. (Step 120AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains on (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue setting confirmation processing or setting change processing. When the setting value is updated in step 120AKSA12, the setting value after updating is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 by executing the process of step 120AKSA08 again.

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120AKSA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA14; Yes), reset the setting changing flag (step 120AKSA15), and send a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16 ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and a set value command indicating the set value is sent to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Note that the setting value command may be transmitted only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19; Yes), RAM clear processing is executed (step 120AKSA20). In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clearing process, among the storage areas of the RAM 102, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as ratio and base, and set value information are retained without being cleared.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as in step S9 (step 112IWS033).

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped by the same processing as in step S6. conduct. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034-S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10-S12 shown in FIG.

The set values may be displayed on the image display device 5 at step 120AKSA08. Then, subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5 .

Also, during execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are lit or blinked). good too. By notifying using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. It should be noted that the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes during the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting values are stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM), unless the setting change is completed. , may be regarded as an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, a setting change flag (not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and at the end of the setting change process, the setting change flag is stored. If the setting change flag is ON when the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed, an error is assumed. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not progress normally midway, the store clerk at the game hall may misunderstand that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error will occur, so that the setting change can be reliably completed.

Also, at step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read out from the backup RAM, and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be extinguished, or if all segments are lit during setting confirmation processing and setting change processing, all segments may be blinked).

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8, when the setting key 112IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting change processing (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, setting confirmation processing (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, initialization processing (step 120AKSA20, etc.) is executed if the clear switch is on, and recovery processing (step 112IWS024) if the clear switch is off. is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 10-5 to 10-7, while making some processing common, branching according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) , the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process are executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as individual processes.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-9(A) and 10-9(B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, power to the pachinko game machine 1 is cut off. The display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends when the supply stops. When the power is turned off and the large winning opening is open during a jackpot game or the like, power supply to the solenoid 82 is stopped and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 112IW051 is turned ON. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9(E), the CPU 103 stores the set values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the game arcade clerk or the like. store (update storage) in the backup area of At this time, the CPU 103 displays on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
If pending storage is stored in the backup area 102, the pending storage is cleared. Also, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 10-9(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off), RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state where a game can be played, that is, a state where a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9(F), the CPU 103 displays "E.E.E.E." It is possible to

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characterizing portion 112IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. A set value ("3" for the characteristic portion 112IW) may be displayed.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 53AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 53AK will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 53AK is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values, and it is possible to control to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different ratios according to the set set values. In the characteristic portion 53AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying/suggesting that the display result will be a big win (control to a big win game state) during execution of the variable display.

Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 7 when the variable display is started. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning a big hit. Notice effects (especially highly reliable notice effects that will result in a big hit) are easier to execute when the display result is a big hit. The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability means the reliability of the big win, and means the ratio of the big win when the announcement effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the occurrence rate or reliability of the announcement effect may differ from what is intended due to fluctuations due to the set values, or the reliability may change, which may confuse the player. In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 53AK, by adjusting (changing) the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the setting value, at least one of the appearance rate of the notice effect and the reliability is set to the same or substantially the same range. adjusted within. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be set as intended, and the player can be prevented from being confused by the notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent setting values from being unreasonably suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 53AK includes not only the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect that are the same, but also those that are adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that the same effect as in the case of being the same can be obtained as long as they are within substantially the same range. The term “substantially the same range” may be within a predetermined range, such as within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate or reliability of the advance notice effect as perceived by the player. may be within substantially the same range such that they are felt to be the same.

FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the announcement X as the announcement effect of the characteristic portion 53AK. FIG. 11-1(A) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three levels of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" for the set value "1", "1/250" for the set value "2", and the set value In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of execution of the notice X to the big hit (percentage of the total variation) A (= jackpot probability a x execution ratio b) is ``1/600'' when the setting value is ``1'', and the setting value is ``2''. is "1/500" in the case of , and "1/400" in the case of the set value "3".

In addition, the probability of losing c (= 1-jackpot probability a) is "299/300" when the setting value is "1", "249/250" when the setting value is "2", and "199" when the setting value is "3". /200”. The execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of losing is "1/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) B (=probability of failure c×execution ratio d) at which the advance notice X is executed and becomes a failure is approximately “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (=A+B) of the notice X in all fluctuations is "7/600" when the setting value is "1", "6/500" when the setting value is "2", and "5" when the setting value is "3". /400”. In addition, the reliability D (=A/C) of the notice X is "1/7" (approximately 14%) for the set value "1" and "1/6" (approximately 17%) for the set value "2". ), and when the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution ratio of the announcement effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the setting value and without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 11-1(B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(B), unlike the example shown in FIG. When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". In addition, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "3/299" for the setting value "1", "2.5/249" for the setting value "2", and "2" for the setting value "3". /199”.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "6/500" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and to suitably execute the announcement effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the announcement effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect are adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects that are featured (that is, some notice effects), and for other notice effects, without adjusting the execution ratio, depending on the set value The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, the other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing this, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of deciding whether or not to execute the notice effects. increase can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is different, but even if it is the same as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the notice X is The rate B of execution and failure is approximately the same "1/100" regardless of the setting value, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also approximately the same (approximately 1.17% to 1.25%). , the execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of failure may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big win, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be made within the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

FIG. 11-1(C) shows an example in which the rate of appearance of notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. ”, “2/249” for the set value “2”, and “1.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution frequency of the notice effect, and from suggesting the set value unnecessarily. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the setting value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated, and the set value can be estimated. Incidentally, by matching the appearance rate, the reliability corresponding to the set value may change relatively greatly (about plus or minus 10%), such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 11D shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. ”, “2.5/249” for the set value “2”, and “2.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so an improvement in the operation rate of the pachinko game machine 1 can be expected.

In addition, in FIG. 11-1 (D), by changing the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of failure according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X was adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value. However, by making the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of losing the same regardless of the set value, and by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the big hit according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so that In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

The adjustment examples of the big hit probability a and the execution ratios b and d of the advance notice shown in FIGS. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values, it is necessary to make the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values. Moreover, at least one of the notice execution ratios b and d should be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is set to be the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a×b+(1−a)×d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the setting value. At least one of b and d should be adjusted. In addition, when the reliability D of the announcement effect is set to be the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the announcement effect is equal (a×b)/(a×b+(1−a)×d) regardless of the setting value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that the same (substantially the same) are obtained.

In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 11-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but if there are multiple jackpot types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) is changed according to the jackpot type. can be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 11-1, and there are normal jackpots and probability variable jackpots as jackpot types, and the case where either jackpot type is given at an even ratio (50%) at the time of the jackpot explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the variable probability jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 11-1. In this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot is "60/100" when the setting value is "1", "50/100" when the setting value is "2", and "3" when the setting value is "3". In this case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) A1 (=probability of normal jackpot a1×execution ratio b1) of execution of advance notice X to the normal jackpot is “1/1000” regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variable jackpot is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot when the notice X is executed (percentage of all fluctuations) A2 (= probability variable jackpot probability a2 × execution ratio b2) is set to “1/1200” for the set value “1” 2", it is "1/1000", and the setting value is "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (percentage of total variation) A (=A1+A2) that becomes a big hit when the notice X is executed is "44/24000" when the setting value is "1" and "48/24000" when the setting value is "2". ”, and “54/24000” when the set value is “3”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "196/(299×80)" for the setting value "1" and " 192/(249×96)”, and “186/(199×120)” for the set value “3”. Therefore, the ratio of failure due to the execution of advance notice X (percentage of all fluctuations) is "196/24000" for the setting value "1", "192/24000" for the setting value "2", and "192/24000" for the setting value "2". 3" is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 11B, the appearance rate C (=A+B) of the advance notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are a plurality of jackpot types, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. can be By doing so, while the execution ratio of the notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, when the notice effect is executed, the ratio of which jackpot type will be different depending on the setting value. Execution of the advance notice effect leads to expectation of a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2, the appearance rate of the notice X is adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the time execution rate. That is, at least one of the announcement execution ratios b1 and b2 and d should be adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a1×b1+a2×b2+c×d of the announcement X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X according to the jackpot type. In this case, regardless of the setting value, the reliability D of the advance notice effect D=(a1×b1+a2×b2)/(a1×b1+a2×b2+((1−a1−a2)×d) is the same (substantially the same). At least one of the execution ratios b1 and b2 of the notice and d may be adjusted as follows.By doing so, the notice effect is executed while the reliability of the notice effect is the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which type of jackpot is to be won differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot) will be achieved by executing the advance notice performance according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects among the advance notice effects, the execution ratio of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. For example, there are normal big wins and variable probability big wins (distribution of 50% of the big win types) as the big win types, and a notice Y for notifying that the big wins will be the variable probability big wins may be executed as the advance notice effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-3, in the case of a normal jackpot or a loss, the execution ratio of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Y at the time of the variable probability big hit is "60/100" for the set value "1", "50/100" for the set value "2", and "40/100" for the set value "3". 100”. The jackpot probability is similar to the example shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the advance notice Y of all fluctuations is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the advance notice Y for notifying that the probability variable big win will be achieved can be executed at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to foresee that the variable probability big hit will occur regardless of the set value. In addition, since the advance notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the notice Y is executed only at the time of the variable probability big hit, so the reliability is 100%.

A foretelling effect for foretelling the possibility of a variable probability big hit may be executed when the game is lost. For example, when executing the advance notice Z to give notice of a variable probability big hit as the notice effect, as shown in FIG. /100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probability variable jackpot is the same as the execution ratio of the notice Y shown in FIG. /1000”. Then, the execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of failure is "3/2990" for the set value "1", "2.5/2490" for the set value "2", and "2" for the set value "3". /1990”. The rate B at which the advance notice Y is executed and results in a loss is "1/1000" in any set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the advance notice Z in all fluctuations is "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended rate, and in the case of a big win, a notice of a probability variable big win. Z can be performed favorably. In addition, since the advance notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Either the appearance rate or the reliability of the advance notice Z may differ depending on the set value.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in 53AK will be described. The lower arrows in FIG. 11-5(A) indicate that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. indicates that there is When it is decided to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image 53AK001 as shown in FIG. is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state without being conscious of the set value. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-5(C), the decorative design showing the number 7 stops in the decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-5(D), the characters "Super Reach!" are displayed, and for example, as shown in FIG. be started. During the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win, for example, as shown in FIG.

Then, for example, immediately before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. be. As a result, the player comes to expect a variable probability big win. In particular, in the case of the notice Y, it is confirmed that the probability variable jackpot will be achieved, so the interest is improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z are made executable, the effect is to give notice/suggestion that both of them will result in a variable probability big hit. It is preferable to make some presentation modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big hit, a message indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. Note that the effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-5 is just an example, and any effect effect may be used as long as it can suggest/predict whether the game will be a big hit or whether a variable probability big win will occur.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 53AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the set values are provided in three stages from 1 to 3, but the set values may be set in two stages or less or in four stages or more (for example, six stages). Also, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. However, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. Also, the big-hit probability according to the setting value shown in FIG. 11-1 etc. is also an example, and the step-by-step big-hit probability according to the setting value is sufficient.

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the notice effect is set to the set value so that at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for all set values (set values 1 to 3) is the same or substantially within the same range. I was trying to change (adjust) accordingly, but among the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values is the same or almost within the same range. may For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and the second setting value (for example, setting value 2) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. good. Also, when the set values are in six stages, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. , at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the second set value group (eg, set values 4 to 6) may be set to be the same or substantially within the same range.

In the above embodiment, as the specific effect, the appearance rate and reliability of at least some of the advance notice effects are set to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values, but the specific effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when determining the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs on the side of the effect control board 12, by varying the determination ratio of the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs according to the set value, First, the appearance rate and reliability of each ready-to-win effect and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-run number may be controlled to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, a table in which a different execution ratio is assigned for each set value may be used to decide whether to execute the notice effect. A table serving as a reference may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be generated by calculating a parameter corresponding to the set value in the table, and whether or not to execute the notice effect may be determined using the generated table.

The execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4 are examples, and can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Further, as the advance notice effect, other advance notice effects other than the advance notice effects shown in the above embodiments may be executable. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set values, and in some or all of the other notice effects, the set values The rate of occurrence and the degree of reliability may be changed according to the set values assuming the same execution ratio regardless of the number. For example, among the notice effects, the notice effects with relatively high reliability are set so that the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the setting value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. A high advance notice effect may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values for all the notice effects, the control burden related to the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effects is reduced. can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific notice effect out of multiple types of notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is other setting values, it is not executed (or is executed). difficult). For example, a specific announcement effect with a high degree of reliability (such as a jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (such as In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of failure. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance by failing despite the execution of the specific advance notice performance, and to suggest/notify that the set value is high.

In the diagrams shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect. ) may be determined. In this case, even when determining the type of notice effect, the execution ratio of each notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each notice effect are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set value. It can be different according to your needs.

In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice was determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but depending on the fluctuation pattern (whether or not there is reach and type, whether or not there is pseudo-run and number of times) at the time of loss, You may vary the execution ratio of an advance notice production.

In the above embodiment, the probability of a big hit in the variable probability state is not taken into consideration, but even in the variable probability state, the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Also, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. For example, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where the probability of hitting a big hit is high and the announcement effect is easy to execute (high probability state), the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect are adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the set value, In the normal state (low-probability state), such adjustment may not be performed. In addition, between different game states, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may differ, or may be adjusted to be the same or substantially the same range. For example, if the background is shared between the high-precision high base state and the low-precision high-base state to make it indistinguishable, a notice effect (a specific notice effect ) may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range. Furthermore, regardless of the set values, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state from being recognized as visually indistinguishable due to the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect.

In the above embodiment, when there are normal jackpots and variable probability jackpots as jackpot types, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are adjusted to the same or substantially the same range according to the jackpot types regardless of the set values. was becoming The difference between the jackpot types may be the size of the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time-saving state or probability variable state controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

When a small win is provided as a display result and the advance notice effect is executed even when a small win is obtained, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big win and at the time of loss can be changed according to the set value as in the above embodiment. In addition, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the small win according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. . For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in a winning opening opened in a small winning game state and controlled to a big winning game state based on passing through the specific area in the small winning game state, advance notice of a small winning is made. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect will be a notice of a big win, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for predicting a small win may be adjusted to be the same or substantially within the same range regardless of the set values. In this case, when changing the small hit probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect You can adjust the degree. Specifically, considering the big hit probability, small win probability, and loss probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, small win, and loss according to the set value, The appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

If it is possible to execute a notice effect in each of the multiple fluctuations of the pseudo-run, the appearance rate and reliability will be adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the setting value only for the notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-run. You may By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load, compared to the case of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability for all variations of pseudo-runs.

In the above embodiment, only the big hit probability is changed by the setting value, but the effect control board 12 side may change the effect mode and the execution ratio of the effect according to the setting value. For example, even if the variation pattern is the same, a different ready-to-win effect or an effect during variable display such as a pseudo-run may be executed based on the set value. By doing so, the effect mode can suggest a set value according to the execution ratio of the effect.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 53AK may be appropriately combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 53AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 53AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 53AK),
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state,
The specific effect executing means determines the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 11-1(B), (C), FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1(B), (C), FIGS. -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 11-1(B), FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state (for example, reliability) when the specific effect is executed is the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIG. 11-1 (B), FIG. 11 -3, Fig. 11-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set values, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The ratio of controlling to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed according to the set value (eg, FIG. 11-1(C), FIG. 11-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that the game property of guessing the reliability can be provided, and the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be achieved according to the set value, and the interest is improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 54AK)
Further, the characteristic portion 53AK includes the invention related to the characteristic portion 54AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 54AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 54AK),
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means is configured to control a ratio of control to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed when the set value is the first set value, and a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate at which the advantageous state is controlled when the specific effect at the set value is executed is within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIG. 11-1 ( B), (D), Fig. 11-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common reliability (the rate at which the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state) regardless of the set value, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1(B), (D), and 11-4). may
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the reliability of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 11-1(B), FIG. 11-4). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the reliability of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be set to be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-1(B), 11-3, and 11-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set values, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be changed according to the set value (for example, FIG. 11-1(D)).
According to such a configuration, although the reliability of the specific effect is adjusted, the rate of appearance changes, so the interest is improved.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be achieved according to the set value, and the interest is improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 11-2 to 11-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 57AK)
Next, feature 57AK will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 57AK can display, as specific displays corresponding to the variable display, a suspended display corresponding to the suspended variable display before execution and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a pre-reading forewarning effect (holding change forewarning) for changing the display mode of the pending display and the active display.

In addition, it is possible to execute a zone effect that shifts to a zone in the effect, which indicates that the effect state is different from the normal effect state (when the power is turned on, etc.) and is in an advantageous state for the player. During the zone effect, a display or the like is performed on the image display device 5 to indicate that the zone is shifted to the effect zone. The zone effect can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display, and can notify the player that the state is advantageous over a plurality of times of variable display. Such a zone effect is also executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect indicating that it will be advantageous (such as high reliability of the big hit) based on the variable display before execution.

In this embodiment, a display change high probability zone indicating that the display mode of a specific display is likely to change is provided as a performance zone. The zone effect of the display change high probability zone is also called a specific effect. In the case of the display change high probability zone (during execution of the specific effect), the pending change notice is executed and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the case of not being in the display change high probability zone. Thus, in the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change, that is, a big win.

Further, in the characteristic part 57AK, by shifting from the display change high probability zone to the normal effect state, even after the display change high probability zone (execution of the specific effect) ends, the display mode changes in the display change high probability zone. The display mode of the specified display is more likely to change due to execution of the pending change notice than the specific display whose display mode has not changed in the display change high probability zone. As a result, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will further change even after the display change high probability zone ends. The feeling can be maintained, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the characteristic portion 57AK, in addition to the display change high probability zone, a chance zone indicating that the probability of winning a big hit is high is provided as a zone for effect. The zone production of the chance zone is also called special production. Thus, in this embodiment, a plurality of zones are provided, and it is possible to shift to one of the zones as a zone effect. Details of the chance zone will be described later.

FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 12-1(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 with downward arrows. indicates that there is The image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 57AK001 for displaying active display and a pending display area 57AK002 for displaying pending display. In the pending display area 57AK002, it is possible to display up to four pending displays corresponding to the upper limit number of pending, and the right side corresponds to old pending information and the left side corresponds to new pending information. When the variable display ends and the next variable display is performed, the active display is cleared and all specific displays (suspended display and active display) are shifted to the right.

In FIG. 12-1(A), two pending indications are displayed. Here, active indications and pending indications are all displayed as white circles in the normal fashion. Also, the zone effect is not being executed, and the state is the normal effect.

Here, when a game ball enters the winning ball device 6A, as shown in FIG. In addition, since it is determined to shift to the display change high probability zone here, the zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is the display change high probability zone is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and the display change high probability zone is controlled. be.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols for failure stops and the reserved display (specific display) shifts, a star image is displayed for the second reserved display. An effect (change-suggestion effect) in which 57AK004 moves and acts (collides) is executed. In the display change high probability zone, such a change suggesting effect suggests that the display mode of the pending display (specific display) of the action target will change (a pending change notice will be executed). Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1(D), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to, for example, blue.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (E), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the failure stops and the reserved display (specific display) shifts, a change suggesting effect is produced for the first reserved display. executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1(F), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to green, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-1(G), at the timing when the combination of the losing decorative symbols stops and the first pending display shifts to the active display, the change suggesting effect is executed for the active display. be. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1(H), the display mode of the active display targeted for the change suggesting effect changes to purple, for example.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1(I), at the timing when reach is established in the variable display corresponding to the active display, the change suggesting effect is executed for the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-1(J), the display mode of the active display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to red, for example. At this time, the zone display 57AK003 is erased, and the control to the display change high probability zone ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the display change high probability zone ends in the middle of the target variable display (variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the zone effect).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12-1(K), the display mode of the active display changes to gold, for example, without execution of the change-suggestion effect at the timing of developing to super reach.

In this way, when the display change high probability zone is entered, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change. Therefore, by moving to the display change high probability zone, the player can expect a change in the display mode of the specific display and a big win. Further, even after the end of the high probability zone of display change, the change timing of the specific display (Fig. 12-1 (K)) is provided, and the specific display whose display mode changed before the end of the high probability zone of display change , the display mode is more likely to change even after the display change high probability zone ends than the specific display in which the display mode does not change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Even if it is not in the display change high probability zone, the pending display notice may be executed and the display mode of the specific display may change. However, the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is in the display change high probability zone changes more easily than the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone. That is, the number of times the specific display changes tends to increase in the display change high probability zone. As a result, during the display change high probability zone, the user can experience many successful experiences such as changing the display mode of the specific display, and thus the interest in the display change high probability zone can be improved. In addition, the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is in the display change high probability zone is still further than the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone even after the display change high probability zone ends. The display mode is easy to change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the specific display is at the shift of the specific display and at a predetermined timing during active display. Further, in this embodiment, a change suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the display mode of the specific display will change. In particular, it is always executed at all timings when the specific display can change in the display change high probability zone. In addition, in FIG. 12-1, the display mode of the specific display is always changed (change is successful) after execution of the change suggesting effect, but there are cases where it is not changed (change is unsuccessful). . In other words, the change-suggestion effect may be false. By doing so, it is possible to effectively encourage the change of the display mode of the specific display to the display change high probability zone, thereby improving the presentation effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the change suggestion effect is not executed. It should be noted that the change suggestion effect may be executed even when the display change high probability zone is not set. In this case, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone may be lower than in the case of the display change high probability zone. For example, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the execution ratio of the fake change suggestion effect is lower than when it is the display change high probability zone (for example, the fake change suggestion effect is not executed), so that the relative time ratio can be lowered.

It should be noted that the ratio (success ratio) at which the display mode of the specific display changes after execution of the change suggesting presentation may be different between when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone and when it is in the other zone. For example, the success rate may be higher or lower when the display change high probability zone is not selected than when the display change high probability zone is not selected. Further, a plurality of performance modes of the change suggesting performance may be provided, and the success rate and the rate of the subsequent changing performance mode (the number of stages) may differ depending on the performance mode of the change suggesting performance. By doing so, the change-suggestion effects are diversified, and the change-suggestion effects can effectively arouse the player's expectations.

Further, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the mode of execution of the change suggesting effect may be different. When it is not in the display change high probability zone, a change suggesting effect different from that in the case of the display change high probability zone may be executed. By doing so, the production can be diversified, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that regardless of which zone it is, the execution ratio of the change suggestion effect or the determination ratio of the effect mode in the case of execution may be varied depending on whether the specific display actually changes. By doing so, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect increases in the display change high probability zone, and the change suggesting effect in which the display mode of the specific display changes at a high rate is more likely to be executed. In addition, the success rate can be varied depending on the presence or absence of the change-suggestion effect and the mode of effect.

FIG. 12-2 is a flow chart showing the operation of specific display processing for displaying a specific display of the characteristic portion 57AK and executing pending change notice. The specific display process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, for example. Note that the position (execution timing) of the corresponding display process is not limited to the pre-reading notice setting process as long as the effect operation according to the present invention can be realized.

In the specific display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a starting winning has occurred due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step 57AKS001). In the process of step 57AKS001, for example, it is determined whether or not the start winning has occurred by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the starting winning has been received from the main board 11 or not.

If it is determined that a starting prize has occurred (step 57AKS001; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the starting prize and the change process of the display mode of the specific display (pending change notice) A display change pattern corresponding to the effect mode) is determined (step 57AKS002).

In the process of step 57AKS002, based on the effect control command specifying the judgment result of the prefetch judgment received at the time of starting winning, the display result and the fluctuation category (such as rough fluctuation pattern classification) are read ahead, and the final display mode and display A change pattern is determined. In the process of step 57AKS002, by determining the final display mode and the display change pattern, the presence or absence of execution of pending change notice and its presentation mode are determined. In this embodiment, the pending change notice may be executed in which the display mode changes multiple times during the period from when the specific display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends. is determined, a display change pattern (change process) corresponding to the final display mode is determined.

In step 57AKS002, first, the final display mode is determined according to the display result, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-3. In this embodiment, as the display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. Display modes of "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are provided. And, as shown in the determination ratio in Figure 12-3, the display result (variation category) is "non-reach", "normal loss", "super reach loss", "big hit" at different rates The final display mode is determined. In the decision ratio shown in Fig. 12-3, the possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of ("white" <) "blue" < "green" < "purple" < "red" < "gold" < "rainbow" (jackpot reliability), the possibility of becoming a super reach (super reach reliability), and the possibility of establishing a reach are high.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-3, the display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are respectively changed to " Also written as a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, and “g”. In this embodiment, a plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided according to different colors, but a plurality of display modes of the specific display may be provided according to differences in shape, pattern, motif, and character. That is, the difference between "a" to "g" may be a difference in shape, pattern, motif, or character.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the display mode of the specific display remains "white" (when the final display mode is "white"), there is no big win, and the reliability of the big win is 0%. ing. When the display mode becomes "blue", the possibility of establishing reach increases. When the display mode becomes "green", at least reach is established. Also, when the display mode becomes "purple", it is determined that the super reach is achieved. However, when the final display mode is "blue" to "purple", the reliability of the big win is low.

When the display mode of the specific display is "red", the reliability of the big hit is significantly higher (12 times or more) than when it is "purple" or less. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether the display mode becomes "red" or more. When the display mode is "gold", the reliability of the big win is further increased (60%), and when the display mode is "rainbow", it is determined that a big win will occur. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" is determined only 7% at the time of the big hit (generally 1/300 etc. in normal state), the appearance rate is low, and the production with scarcity value (premium production) It has become.

Thus, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is subdivided, and eight levels of display modes are provided. Therefore, when the display change high probability zone is reached, the display mode can be designed to change easily (the number of times of change is increased), and the number of times of change can be increased. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-4(A) and 12-4(B), seven timings "hold 4" and "hold 3" are used as change timings (timings that can be changed) of the display mode of the specific display. , "H2", "H1", "A1", "A2", and "A3" are provided. "Hold 4" is when displayed as the fourth pending display. "H3" is when displayed as the third pending display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "Hold 2" is when displayed as the second pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "Hold 1" is when displayed as the first pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "A1" is when displayed as an active display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "A 2" is when it is displayed as an active display, and the timing of the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern (when the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped due to the establishment of reach, and when all patterns are temporarily stopped during pseudo continuous It is the timing of the first big hit in the middle, etc.). "A3" is the time when it is displayed as an active display, and when it develops into super reach (at the start of the reach performance of super reach, etc.).

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of change stages and change timings of the specific display are provided. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the display mode of the specific display changes, and to improve the appeal of the pending change notice.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4(B), the control to the display change high probability zone is executed at any timing from "H4" to "A1" and ends at the timing of "A2". do. Therefore, "A3" is always outside the display change high probability zone. "A3" is when it develops into super reach, so by ending the display change high probability zone before it develops into super reach, you can prevent the production from being complicated, and pay attention to the reach production of super reach. can be made Two or more change timings may be provided outside the display change high probability zone.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode is determined, the display change pattern is determined according to the determined final display mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display change patterns corresponding to scenarios of changes in the display mode of the specific display at each change timing are provided, and a plurality of display change patterns corresponding to the eventual change to the final display mode are provided. It is designed to be selected and determined from among the types.

FIG. 12-5 is a diagram showing part of the display change pattern of the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 12-5(A) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is b (blue). As shown in FIG. 12-5(A), in this embodiment, there are four display change patterns pt2-1, pt2-2, pt2-3, and pt2-3 as display change patterns when the final display mode is b (blue). pt2-4 are provided. FIG. 12-5 shows the display mode of the specific display at each change timing. For example, the display change pattern pt2-1 is displayed with a (white) from "H4" to "A1", and indicates that it changes from a (white) to b (blue) at "A2". In addition, the display change pattern pt2-4 indicates that "H4" to "A3" are displayed in b (blue).

When determining the display change pattern, one of the display change patterns is determined regardless of the current number of pending memories (that is, the number of pending displays or active displays when winning a prize). there is Therefore, when the display change pattern is determined to have passed the change timing at which the display mode changes (when the number of pending memories is less than the change timing at which the display mode changes), the specific display is performed in the post-change display mode. Is displayed. In addition, FIG. 12-5 also shows the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display, and the number of changes when the final display mode is b (blue) depends on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern. , 0 or 1 time. For example, if the number of pending memories is 2 or less and the display change pattern pt2-3 is determined, it is displayed in b "blue" from beginning to end, and the number of times of change is 0.

FIG. 12-5(B) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is c (green). As shown in FIG. 12-5(B), in this embodiment, seven types of display change patterns pt3-1 to pt3-7 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is c (green). . As shown in FIG. 12-5(B), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is c (green), the number of times of change is 0 to 2 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 12-5(C) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is e (red). As shown in FIG. 12-5(C), in this embodiment, 13 kinds of display change patterns pt5-1 to pt5-13 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is e (red). . As shown in FIG. 12-5(C), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is e (red), the number of times of change is 0 to 4 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 12-5(D) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is g (rainbow). As shown in FIG. 12-5(D), in this embodiment, ten kinds of display change patterns pt7-1 to pt7-10 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is g (rainbow). . As shown in FIG. 12-5(D), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is g (rainbow), the number of times of change is 1 to 6 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 12-5 shows the display change patterns when the final display mode is b, c, e, and g, but a plurality of display change patterns when the final display mode is other are also provided. In the process of step 57AKS002, one of the display change patterns shown in FIG. 12-5 is determined according to the final display mode. The display change pattern may be determined at any rate, but may be at an equal rate, or may be determined at a different rate depending on the display result. In the case of determining different ratios depending on the display results, it is possible to predict and suggest the possibility of a big win depending on the change timing.

The display change pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 is an example, and display change patterns other than those shown in FIG. 12-5 may be provided, and the display change pattern shown in FIG. There may be fewer types.

After determining the final display mode of the specific display and the display change pattern corresponding to the change process of the display mode of the specific display in the processing of step 57 AKS002, whether or not to execute the zone effect and the type of zone in the case of execution are determined. (Step 57AKS003). As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of controlling to the display change high probability zone is executed as the zone effect. In addition, as a zone different from the display change high probability zone, an effect of controlling to a chance zone indicating a high possibility of winning a big hit is also executed. In this embodiment, a normal performance state in which zone performance is not executed, a display change high probability zone, and a chance zone are provided, and control is performed to any one of the zones when zone performance is executed.

In step 57 AKS003, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time has changed. FIG. 12-6(A) shows the determination ratio of whether to shift to the display change high probability zone. As shown in FIG. 12-6(A), when the number of times of change is 5 or 6 times, the zone is always shifted to the display change high probability zone. It is designed not to move to the high probability zone. Further, when the number of times of change is 2 to 4, the greater the number of times of change, the higher the percentage of transition to the display change high probability zone. By doing so, by controlling to the display change high probability zone, the rate at which the specific display changes increases, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

The control to the display change high probability zone ends during the variable display of the target of the pending change notice (after the change timing "a2"), but regardless of the timing at which the display mode changes, the number of times of change is The higher the number, the higher the percentage of transitions to the display change high probability zone. is finished, the rate of change of the specific display (active display) that triggered the zone transition is high. Therefore, even after the control to the display change high probability zone is finished, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.

It should be noted that whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone may be determined depending on whether or not the active display changes at the change timing "a3" outside the display change high probability zone. For example, the higher the number of changes, the higher the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone, and if the active display changes in "A3", the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone is further increased. good too. By doing so, when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the rate of change even after the display change high probability zone ends is high. You will be able to maintain your feelings better.

In step 57AKS003, when it is determined to control to the display change high probability zone, the process proceeds to step 57AKS004 without determining whether to control to the chance zone. That is, in this embodiment, the control to the display change high probability zone is prioritized as the zone effect, and whether or not to control the display change high probability zone is determined. It is not controlled. Note that the order of priority of the zone effects may be reversed. That is, after determining whether or not to control the chance zone, if it is determined not to control to the chance zone, it may be determined whether or not to control the display change high probability zone.

When it is determined not to control to the display change high probability zone, it is determined whether to control to the chance zone. In this case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the chance zone according to the final display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time. FIG. 12-6(B) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to shift to the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), when the final display mode is g (rainbow), it is always shifted to the chance zone, and when the final display mode is f (gold), there is a high probability ( 80%), and if the final display mode is other than those, it is not moved to the chance zone. By doing so, the specific display can be easily changed to a mode with high reliability of the big hit by being controlled by the chance zone, so that the expectation of the player can be improved.

In addition, although the display change high probability zone also has a higher hit reliability than the normal production state, the chance zone has a higher hit reliability than the display change high probability zone (finally, the hit reliability The display mode changes to a high degree) state. In this way, by providing multiple zones such as a display change high probability zone where the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and the success experience is easy to enjoy, and a chance zone where the reliability of the big hit is extremely high, the variations of the zone production are diversified. As a result, the performance effect is improved and the amusement of the game is improved. It should be noted that the chance zone may be set to a state in which the reliability of the big win is higher than in the case of the normal presentation state, but the reliability of the big win is lower than in the display change high probability zone.

Subsequently, the determination results in step 57AKS002 and step 57AKS003 are saved (step 57AKS004), control to display a specific display in a display mode according to the determination result, and control to shift to a zone according to the determination result are executed ( step 57 AKS005). If the control to shift to the zone is executed here, the value corresponding to the zone flag that can identify the current zone should be set. In addition, control may be executed to notify that the zone has been changed by displaying an image corresponding to the zone to be changed on the image display device 5 or the like.

If it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 57AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the pending display (step 57AKS006). Since the pending display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step 57AKS006, for example, depending on whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11, the shift timing of the pending display is shifted. It should be determined whether or not there is

If it is determined that it is time to shift the hold display (step 57AKS006; Yes), control to erase the hold display of the shift source (step 57AKS007) and control to display a specific display of the shift destination (hold display or active display). Execute (step 57AKS008). At this time, for example, the display change pattern is referred to, and in the case of a specific display whose display mode changes at the shift destination, control is also executed to change the specific display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. . Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, control for executing the change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 12-1 is also executed. After that, the specific display process is terminated.

After executing the process of step 57AKS005 or when it is determined that it is not the shift timing for the hold display (step 57AKS006; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009). In step 57AKS009, for example, it is determined whether or not the change timing of "A2" and "A3" has come from the current fluctuation pattern and the value of the timer for measuring the fluctuation time, etc., and the display change pattern is referred to. Then, it is determined whether the display mode of the active display is to be changed at the reached change timing.

When it is determined that it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; Yes), control is performed to change the display mode of the active display (step 57AKS010). In step 57AKS010, for example, the display change pattern is referenced, and control is executed to change the active display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. In addition, in the case of the display change high probability zone, control for executing a change suggestion effect is also executed.

If it is determined that it is not the time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; No), or after executing the process of step 57AKS010, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the zone effect (step 57AKS011). Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the zone effect is being executed from the zone flag, and the end timing of the zone (for example, the display change high probability zone If it is "A2", and if it is a chance zone, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the target's fluctuation). If it is not the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011; No), the specific display process is ended.

If it is the end timing of the zone (step 57AKS011; Yes), the control to end the zone effect is executed (step 57AKS012), and the specific display processing ends. At step 57AKS012, control may be executed to erase the image corresponding to the zone from the image display device 5. FIG.

As described above, by executing the specific display processing by the effect control CPU 120, the effect operation of the pending change notice and the zone effect as shown in FIG. 12-1 is realized.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 57AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the zone effect is controlled to either the display change high probability zone or the chance zone, but the display change high probability zone may be changed to the chance zone. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), when it is controlled to the display change high probability zone, as shown in FIGS. Zone display 57AK005 indicating that it is a chance zone may be displayed from zone display 57AK003 indicating that the game is a chance zone, and the transition to the chance zone may be performed. The timing of shifting from the display change high probability zone to the chance zone may be arbitrary, but for example, during variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone (variable display for pending change notice) or , when the display mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined level or higher (for example, e or higher). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display is easily changed, and the display change high probability zone where the success experience is easy to enjoy is shifted to the chance zone where the reliability of the big hit is extremely high, so that the variation of the performance is increased and the interest of the game is increased. improves. It should be noted that the chance zone may be shifted to the display change high probability zone. In addition, the zone may be changed a plurality of times during one zone presentation. For example, after transitioning to the chance zone, transitioning to the display change high probability zone may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and then transitioning to the chance zone again.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B)′, a zone display 57AK003 indicating a display change high probability zone and a zone display 57AK005 indicating a chance zone are both displayed, and two zones are displayed. It may be possible to migrate in parallel. By doing so, it is possible to inform that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change and that the reliability of the big hit is high, as well as the variety of effects is provided.

In the above embodiment, the change process of the display mode of the specific display (the production mode of the pending change notice) is determined by selecting and determining the display change pattern, but the determination method is arbitrary. The display mode of the specific display at each change timing may be individually determined each time. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the change timing is when the hold display is shifted. However, the change timing is not limited to this, and the display state of the hold display may be changed at any timing during variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of specific displays are displayed, when pending change notice is being executed for one specific display, execution of pending change notice for other specific displays is restricted. not Therefore, after the display mode of one specific display is changed, the display mode of another specific display (for example, the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning) may change. On the other hand, in the case of the display change high probability zone, execution of the pending change notice may be restricted with respect to the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific display and the variable display to be noticed from becoming difficult to understand in the display change high probability zone. In this case, the specific display newly displayed in the high display change probability zone after the end of the high display change probability zone does not change its display mode. On the other hand, the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone (that is, the specific display that triggered the zone transition) may further change. Therefore, it can be said that the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone is more likely to change its display mode than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

Even after the display change high probability zone (specific effect) ends, the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone is higher than the specific display whose display mode has not changed during the display change high probability zone. In addition to the fact that the specific display whose display mode changed during the display change high probability zone changes more frequently, the display mode does not change during the display change high probability zone. The specific display may not change at all, and the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone may change. In addition, the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone tends to change its display mode more times than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

The display mode of a plurality of specific displays may be changed in the display change high probability zone. For example, by changing the specific display other than the specific display (specific display of the target) corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone to "blue", it may be difficult to understand which target is. . At that time, a pending change notice in which multiple specific displays change at the same time, and a change suggestive production that suggests that multiple specific displays will change at the same time (for example, a production in which an effect is applied to the entire reserved display area or an image acts, etc.) may be executed. In this case, a plurality of specific indications may be changed successfully, or only one may be changed. Also, the pending change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time may be executed only in the display change high probability zone, or may be executed in other zones or in a normal state where zone production is not in progress. good.

In the above embodiment, there is one type of display change high probability zone, but there may be a plurality of types of display change high probability zone. For example, a weak display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the normal state and a strong display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than the weak display change high probability zone are provided. may In this case, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be made different to indicate which display change high probability zone it is. For example, the weak indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a blue zone indication 57AK003, and the strong indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a red zone indication 57AK003. Then, the weak indication change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong indication change high probability zone. In order to shift from the weak display change high probability zone to the strong display change high probability zone, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that all of them are display change high probability zones, and it is possible to notify that the degree of expectation has changed. Further, the display change high-probability zone may include a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display has a high probability of changing and a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display tends to change more frequently.

When a plurality of types of display change high probability zones are provided, it may be possible to switch between each display change high probability zone and the chance zone. For example, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone, and then the chance zone. Alternatively, the weak indication change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone, and then the strong indication change high probability zone may be transitioned. In addition, it is also possible to limit the transition to a specific route so that the zone does not move, or to perform an effect such that the route diverges (a effect indicating which zone to move to).

In the above-described embodiment, the change suggesting effect is a effect in which the star image 57AK004 acts on the specific display, but the effect mode of the change suggesting effect is not limited to this, and a predetermined image such as a character image is displayed. Alternatively, it may suggest that the display mode of the specific display changes due to sound, lamp, movement of the movable body, or the like. Further, the effect mode (effect device) of the change suggesting effect may be changed depending on whether the zone effect is being performed or not, and depending on which zone it is.

In the above embodiment, the zone displays 57AK003 and 57AK005 are used to notify that the zone effect is being executed and to which zone the control is performed. The zone may be notified by a lamp, an operation of a movable body, or the like. In addition, the background image may differ greatly depending on the zone, the type of zone may be displayed in the display area of the specific display (active display area 57AK001, the reserved display area 57AK002), and the display mode and color of the display area of the specific display may be displayed. may vary by zone.

A sub-display device (sub-liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 is provided to display the type of zone on the sub-liquid crystal. You may Also, the display position, display size, and animation mode (update speed, operation speed, operation direction, etc.) of the specific display may be varied depending on the zone type. Any one of the above zone notification methods may be used, or any combination thereof may be used.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 57AK may be combined as appropriate. Also, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 57AK and the invention relating to other characteristic portions may be combined as appropriate.

For example, by combining the invention relating to the characteristic portion 57AK with the invention relating to the characteristic portions 53AK and 54AK, the appearance rate and reliability of the pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice, zone effect) of the present application are the same or substantially the same regardless of the setting value. The execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be adjusted according to the set value so as to be within the same range.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 57AK)
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 57AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display,
A change effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggesting effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 12-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machine 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker , 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12
Effect control board, 13 Sound control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Normal symbol display, 21 Gate switch, 22A, 22B Start switch, 23 Count switch, 30 Hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push Button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104,124 random number circuit, 105,125 I/O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
change effect execution means for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display;
and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect , the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is greater than the specific display whose display mode did not change while the specific effect was being executed. is also easy to change the display mode,
A notification image that allows recognition that the specific effect is being executed can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific display,
The display mode after the specific display is changed includes a first mode and a second mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first mode,
After executing the specific effect, it is possible to execute the special effect with a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect,
When the special effect is executed, the specific display changes to the second mode and a special image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images